Official Software
Get notified when we add a new BMWi3 Manual

We cover 60 BMW vehicles, were you looking for one of these?

BMW - 320D - Owners Manual - 2005 - 2020
1999-06--BMW--Z3 Roadster--6 Cylinders 3.0L FI DOHC--32751102
1999-06--BMW--Z4--6 Cylinders 2.5L MFI DOHC--32881202
BMW - X5 - Workshop Manual - 2006 - 2013
1999-06--BMW--Z3--6 Cylinders 2.8L MFI DOHC--32536602
BMW BMW 2 Series BMW 218 Owners Manuals
1999-06--BMW--325xi AWD--6 Cylinders 2.5L MFI DOHC--32750501
BMW BMW X Series BMW X1 Owners Manuals
BMW BMW 1 Series BMW 116 Owners Manuals
BMW - 730i - Parts Catalogue - 1988 - 2020
BMW - X3 2.5i - Workshop Manual - 2004 - 2006
1999-06--BMW--M3--6 Cylinders 3.2L MFI DOHC--32536501
BMW - 320i - Owners Manual - 2006 - 2011
BMW - 318i Sedan - Workshop Manual - 1992 - 1998
BMW BMW 5 Series BMW 520 Workshop Manuals
BMW - X3 xDrive28i - Workshop Manual - 2011 - 2020
1999-06--BMW--Z4--6 Cylinders 3.0L FI DOHC--32985902
1999-06--BMW--325i--6 Cylinders 2.5L MFI DOHC--32846801
1999-06--BMW--330Ci--6 Cylinders 3.0L FI DOHC--32750201
BMW BMW Z Series BMW Z3 Workshop Manuals
1999-06--BMW--Z3--6 Cylinders 2.5L MFI DOHC--32536603
BMW - 318i - Workshop Manual - 1990 - 2000
BMW - 118i - Owners Manual - 2004 - 2011
BMW - 328i - Workshop Manual - 1999 - 2005
1999-06--BMW--525i--6 Cylinders 2.5L MFI DOHC--32985001
1999-06--BMW--M5--10 Cylinders 5.0L MFI DOHC--33044401
BMW BMW X Series BMW X5 Workshop Manuals
BMW - 2002 - Workshop Manual - 1972 - 1972
BMW - 540i - Parts Catalogue - 1997 - 2003
BMW - 328xi - Workshop Manual - 2007 - 2020
BMW - 335i - Workshop Manual - 2009 - 2009
1999-06--BMW--323is--6 Cylinders 2.5L MFI DOHC--32536001
1999-06--BMW--325xi AWD--6 Cylinders 3.0L FI DOHC--33064001
1999-06--BMW--760Li--12 Cylinders 6.0L MFI DOHC--32920201
2000-05--BMW--X5 AWD--6 Cylinders 3.0L FI DOHC--32986103
BMW - 320D - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2008
2000-05--BMW--X5 AWD--8 Cylinders 4.4L MFI DOHC--32605001
1999-06--BMW--Z4--6 Cylinders 2.5L MFI DOHC--32920501
BMW BMW 5 Series BMW 535 Workshop Manuals
BMW - 635CSi - Workshop Manual - 1985 - 1985
BMW - Z4 - Workshop Manual - (2003)
BMW - Z3 roadster 2.5i - Owners Manual - 2000 - 2000
1999-06--BMW--Z4 M Coupe--6 Cylinders 3.2L MFI DOHC--33091901
BMW - X5 - Parts Catalogue - 2000 - 2017
BMW - Z3 - Parts Catalogue - 1996 - 2003
BMW - M4 - Workshop Manual - 2016 - 2016
BMW - 2002Tii - Workshop Manual - 1975 - 1975
BMW - 318i - Owners Manual - 2001 - 2005
BMW - 335i - Workshop Manual - 2007 - 2007
1999-06--BMW--M3--6 Cylinders 3.2L MFI DOHC--32985801
BMW - Z4 - Workshop Manual - (2003)
1970-1988--BMW--635CSi--6 Cylinders 3.5L MFI SOHC--32146501
BMW - Z3 2.8 - Workshop Manual - 1997 - 2000
BMW - Z3 - Repair Guide - (2000)
BMW - X5 4.4i - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2006
BMW - 325i - Owners Manual - 2003 - 2003
BMW - X3 - Workshop Manual - 2016 - 2016
BMW - Z4 - Repair Guide - (2003)
BMW BMW 3 Series BMW 316 Owners Manuals
BMW - M3 Sedan - Owners Manual - 1992 - 1998
Summary of Content
Contents A-Z THE BMW i3. OWNER'S MANUAL. BMW i. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW i SUSTAINABILITY. AUTOMOBILITY. REINVENTED. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 1 22.01.14 15:19 THE SUSTAINABLE PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE OF BMW i. 01. DEVELOPMENT • Redefine design principles for purpose-built e-mobility. • Reshape aerodynamics for less drag. • Replace traditional materials with recycled and renewable materials. 04. RECYCLING • Retain used batteries as temporary storage units, e.g. for solar energy. • Recycle carbon fibers by returning them to the production process. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 2 22.01.14 15:19 03. UTILIZATION • Recharge battery with innovative BMW eDrive technology. • Receive power from clean energy producers for zero emission driving. • Reduce CO 2 emissions by 50% throughout the product life cycle by using energy from renewable sources. 02. PRODUCTION • Use clean electric power for BMW i plants. • Reduce energy consumption in BMW i production. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 3 22.01.14 15:19 01. DEVELOPMENT FOR OVER THREE QUARTERS OF A CENTURY, THE BASIC IDEA BEHIND THE CAR WAS LEFT UNTOUCHED. Until now. Today, the BMW i3 introduces a wealth of new ways to create the ultimate sustainable electric car. One key innovation is LifeDrive: the first serial production passenger cell made of light and extremely robust carbon fiber. It substantially reduces the weight of the vehicle for maximum electric range. Moreover, streamflow aerodynamics reduce drag and energy consumption. The interior of the BMW i3 features natural-fiber based raw materials in the instrument panel and door trim surfaces. Textiles for the seats are made of up to 100% recycled materials. The leather components are tanned with natural olive leaf extract, which gives the leather a unique, fresh scent. The interior wood panels are made of open-pore eucalyptus wood. All wood is sourced from responsible forestry and certified by the Forest Stewardship Council® (FSC®). Innovation is also built into the BMW i3 product development process itself: To ensure a truly sustainable product, measurable targets were already set in the early strategic phase of development to define environmental guidelines for the entire product life cycle – from the sourcing of raw materials to production, utilization and recycling. These were agreed to and monitored throughout the development phase of the vehicle. The life cycle assessment process and the results have been certified by a third party according to ISO 14040/14044. Further details can be found online at bmw-i.com. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 4 22.01.14 15:19 The Life module is made of ultra-light carbon fiber. 30% lighter than aluminum. 50% lighter than steel. The interior of the BMW i3 includes a variety of premium-quality, sustainable materials. Approximately 25% of the thermoplastics used are composed of recyclates or have been replaced by renewable materials. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 5 22.01.14 15:19 02. PRODUCTION THE BMW i3: FORGED BY THE POWER OF WIND AND WATER. The BMW i3 not only produces zero emissions while driving; all electricity that goes into its production in Leipzig is generated from renewables. BMW factories have been leading the way in sustainable production for a long time now, but BMW i has gone even further and significantly improved its facilities. The BMW i factory in Leipzig produces its own renewable energy – right on the premises – and operates on 100% clean electric power at zero emissions. It also consumes significantly less resources. And consider the unique approach to carbon fiber production: It has been located in Moses Lake, USA, so that all operations can be powered completely by renewable energy from the numerous hydroelectric plants nearby. For BMW i, sustainable production is not only an environmental consideration but also a social one, creating future-proof job profiles and training BMW i’s suppliers to comply with advanced sustainability standards. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 6 22.01.14 15:19 100% renewable energy -50% -70% energy input water consumption Energy and resource consumption per BMW i3 produced* * compared to the industryleading BMW average Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 7 22.01.14 15:19 03. UTILIZATION THE ORIGIN OF EMISSION-FREE DRIVING: POWER FROM RENEWABLE RESOURCES. With zero local emissions while driving, the BMW i3 helps reduce air pollution in urban areas. When charged with clean power – generated from renewables – the positive impact is greater still. This is because, throughout the entire product life cycle, driving the new BMW i3 on energy from renewable sources can potentially reduce emissions (CO2 equivalents) by up to 50%, when compared to a highly efficient vehicle of the same class with a combustion engine. That’s why BMW i recommends clean energy producers, to help make an even bigger difference. Further details can be found online at bmw-i.com/sustainability. As if that weren’t enough, the innovative eDrive technology of the BMW i3 also features all sorts of efficiency enhancers: from state-ofthe-art brake energy recuperation to range-increasing ECO PRO+ driving mode, which can boost the driving range by up to 40km at the touch of a button. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 8 22.01.14 15:19 In terms of its performance throughout the entire product life cycle – from the sourcing of raw materials to production, use and recycling – how does the BMW i3 compare to a vehicle with a high-efficiency combustion engine? 50% fewer CO2 equivalents when driving on electricity from renewable sources. 30% fewer CO2 equivalents when driving with EU-25 or comparable energy mixes. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 9 22.01.14 15:19 04. RECYCLING AT BMW i WE NOT ONLY PIONEER NEW MATERIALS, WE ALSO TAKE CARE OF THEIR RECYCLING. Recycling is a given at BMW i. Production residues from carbon fiber production, carbon components and body parts, for instance, are valuable materials. That’s why they are either reused as secondary raw materials for the in-house BMW i production cycle or recycled for other automotive or non-automotive applications. And the early production stage of a BMW i3 marks a first for the automotive industry – the first time recycled carbon fiber is being used for a vehicle passenger cell. Together with partners, BMW i is pioneering closed loops for up to 100% of carbon fiber from production residues or end-of-life vehicles. BMW i is also branching out in new directions when it comes to the recycling of other components and materials. For example, there are many possible ways to reuse the high-capacity BMW i lithium ion battery pack. A very simple and effective one is as temporary energy storage for solar power or wind energy to make renewably produced energy available when it is needed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 10 22.01.14 15:19 100% of used battery packs could, for example, be reused as temporary storage units for solar power equipment and wind energy systems. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 11 22.01.14 15:19 To find out more about the sustainability philosophy behind your BMW i, please visit: bmw-i.com/sustainability Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW_i3_Bedienungseinleger_210x138mm_us_lektoriert_RZ.indd 12 22.01.14 15:19 i3 Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW i. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Handbook before starting off in your new BMW i. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW i. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW i. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride. BMW AG The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app. Additional information on the Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_i_drivers_guide Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 © 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/15, 03 15 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Addendum ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document. 1. Where the terms “service center,” “the service center,” “your service center,” “service specialist,” or “service” are used in the Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. 2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a “service center” or “your service center,” we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. While BMW of North America LLC, at no cost to you, will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops. 3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle. 4. At page 7, under the warranty section's discussion of homologation, where it states that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there,” the text should read that you “may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.” 5. At page 7, under the heading “Body work and working on the high-voltage system,” the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends to have modifications and work on the vehicle only be carried out by an authorized BMW i service center or one that operates according to BMW i specifications with personnel trained accordingly. If work is not carried out properly, there is the risk of fire and fatal injury from electrocution due to the highvoltage system's high voltage.” 6. At page 8, under the “Parts and Accessories” section, in the sixth sentence, the word “cannot” should read “does not.” 7. At page 55, in the “Check and replace safety belts” section, the text beginning, “This should only be done by your service center …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly.” 8. At page 150 under the heading: “Objects within the range of movement of the pedals” and at page 203 under the heading: “Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Addendum by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place.” 9. At page 155, under the heading: “Have maintenance carried out,” the sentence beginning, “The maintenance should be carried out …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center.” 10. At page 161, under the heading “Make sure that the charging device is in flawless operating condition,” the word “flawless” should read “proper.” 11. At page 173, under the heading “Tire inflation specifications,” the sentence beginning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes … .” should be disregarded. 12. At page 176, under the heading: “Mounting,” the paragraph beginning, “Have mounting and balancing …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends that you have mounting and balancing performed by your service center or a tire mounting specialist.” 13. At page 177, under the heading: “Approved wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term “Recommended” should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non-recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle. 14. At page 181, under the heading: “Snow Chains,” the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle. Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center. 15. At page 182, under the heading “Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar” should be disregarded. 16. At page 185, under the heading: “Adding or changing engine oil,” the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: If necessary, BMW recommends that you have oil added changed at your BMW dealer's service center or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with BMW specifications. 17. At page 189, under the heading: “Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models,” the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Addendum 18. At page 194, under the “Battery replacement” section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: Use of recommended vehicle batteries The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available. After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any “check control” messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 210. 6 Notes At a glance 14 18 26 29 31 34 Cockpit iDrive Voice activation system Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle BMW eDRIVE Safety of the high-voltage system Controls 38 53 60 64 75 90 93 107 110 128 135 143 Opening and closing Adjusting Transporting children safely Driving Displays Lights Safety Driving stability control systems Driving comfort Climate control Interior equipment Storage compartments Mobility 160 169 172 173 182 184 186 188 190 196 200 Charging vehicle Refueling Fuel Wheels and tires Under the hood Engine oil Coolant Maintenance Replacing components Breakdown assistance Care Reference 206 Technical data 208 Appendix 210 Everything from A to Z Driving tips 148 Things to remember when driving 152 Loading 154 Increase range Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Notes Notes Using this Owner's Manual Symbols The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic is by using the index. Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of information. Orientation Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. User's manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The topics Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication and the short commands of the voice activation system can be retrieved on the Control Display via the Integrated Owner's Handbook. Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to select individual functions. ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system. ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system. Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly. Additional sources of information The service center will be happy to answer any other questions you may have. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. BMW i Driver’s Guide App The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ tries as an app. Additional information on the Internet: Indicates, on certain parts or assemblies, that incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of orange-colored high-voltage components re‐ sults in the risk of life-threatening injury from electric shock. www.bmw.com/bmw_i_drivers_guide Vehicle features and options This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional 6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Notes equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently from what is shown in the illustrations. Status of the Owner's Manual Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con‐ ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle. Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. For your own safety ating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐ gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre. Working on the vehicle, maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, especially the use of high-performance high-voltage electronics and modern materials such as carbon, requires special knowledge when making modifications to and working on the vehicle, as well as cus‐ tomized maintenance and repair work. BMW recommends to have modifications and work on the vehicle, especially maintenance and repairs to the high-voltage system and carbon body as well as the retrofitting of ac‐ cessories only be carried out by an authorized BMW i service center or one that operates ac‐ cording to BMW i specifications with personnel trained accordingly. Body work and working on the high-volt‐ age system Do not perform any modifications or work on the vehicle, especially maintenance and repair work on the high-voltage system and the car‐ bon body and avoid retrofitting accessories. If work is not carried out properly, there is the risk of fire and fatal injury from electrocution due to the high-voltage system's high voltage. BMW recommends to have modifications and work on the vehicle only be carried out by an authorized BMW i service center or one that operates according to BMW i specifications with personnel trained accordingly.◀ Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require‐ ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ Parts and accessories BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐ ries approved by BMW for this purpose. Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 7 Notes ucts approved by BMW and related qualified advice. ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ ranty. BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW. ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐ ating conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's own stringent quality standards. California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐ nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ lowing warranties: 8 ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ ited Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information. Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ ures: ▷ BMW Maintenance system ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri‐ ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Notes Data memory Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ tion about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment: ▷ Operating mode of system components, fill levels for instance. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration. ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ ing the stability control system. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ pair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, in‐ cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ nostic tools. You can obtain further information there if you need it. After an error is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis. With the vehicle in use there are situations where you can associate these technical data with individuals if combined with other infor‐ mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer - such as vehicle emergency locating - you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle. Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were operating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under‐ standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 9 Notes Vehicle identification number formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety. The vehicle identification number can be found under a cover under the front passenger seat. The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield. Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐ wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ 10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Notes Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 11 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 At a glance Cockpit Cockpit Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. All around the steering wheel 1 Power windows 50 2 Exterior mirror operation 57 Automatic headlight con‐ trol 91 3 Unlocking hood 44 Daytime running lights 91 Unlock tailgate 45 Instrument lighting 91 With Range Extender: vent fuel tank 169 4 Lights 14 5 Left steering column stalk Parking lights 90 Turn signal 71 Low beams 90 High beams, head‐ light flasher 71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Cockpit 6 7 At a glance Roadside parking lights 91 Voice activation 26 On-board computer 86 Telephone Instrument cluster 75 Switch drive readiness on and off 64 Thumbwheel for selection lists 85 11 Adjust steering wheel 59 12 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed 116 8 Selector lever 66 9 Right steering column stalk Wiper 72 Resume speed 118 Rain sensor 73 Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ ing 117 Clean the windshields and head‐ lights 73 Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐ terrupting 110 Rear window wiper in Canadian models 73 Cruise control, adjust dis‐ tance 110 Rear window wiper 73 Cruise control rocker switch 117 13 Horn, total area Cleaning rear window 74 10 Steering wheel buttons, right Entertainment source Volume Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 15 At a glance Cockpit All around the center console 1 Control Display 18 6 Controller with buttons 18 2 Radio/Multimedia, refer to Integrated Own‐ er's Handbook 7 Parking brake 70 8 PDC Park Distance Control 118 3 Glove compartment 143 Rearview camera 121 4 Climate control 128 Parking assistant 123 5 Hazard warning system 196 9 Driving Dynamics Control 108 Intelligent Safety 100 16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Cockpit At a glance All around the roofliner 1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest 196 4 Reading lights 91 2 Glass sunroof, powered 51 5 Interior lights 91 3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ senger airbag 95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 17 At a glance iDrive iDrive Vehicle features and options Control Display This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Hints The concept The iDrive combines the functions of many switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ ated from a central location. Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other traffic, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow it.◀ ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions. ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Display or other surfaces can be damaged. ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐ lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐ duced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, e.g. through shadow or climate control system, the normal functions are re-established. Switching on 1. Turn on operations. 2. Press the controller. Switch off 1. Press button. 2. "Turn off control display" Control elements at a glance Control elements Controller 1 Control Display The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on the equipment version, with touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller. 18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 iDrive 1. Turn. At a glance Press button Function BACK Displays the previous panel. OPTION Opens the Options menu. Operating concept Opening the main menu Press button. 2. Press. 3. Move in four directions. The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu. Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected. 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. Buttons on controller Press button Function MENU Open the main menu. RADIO Opens the Radio menu. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu. NAV Opens the Navigation menu. TEL Opens the phone menu. 2. Press the controller. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 19 At a glance iDrive Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings". Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Move the controller to the left. Closes current display and shows previous display. Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. Reopens previous display by pressing BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed. Options menu ▷ Move the controller to the right. Opens new display on top of previous screen. The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". This area remains unchanged. ▷ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed. White marks to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened. Display of an opened menu When selecting a menu, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. Opening the Options menu Press button. The "Options" menu is displayed. 20 3. Press the controller. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. Function is activated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 iDrive Function is deactivated. Touchpad At a glance ▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad. Using interactive map and Internet Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller: Selecting functions 1. "Settings" 2. "Touchpad" 3. Select the desired function. ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. ▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐ tive map. ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses. ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered letters and numbers. Entering letters and numbers Entering letters requires some practice at the beginning. When entering, pay attention to the following: ▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters and numbers, it may be necessary to reel via the controller to the corresponding In‐ put mode, refer to page 24, e.g. when the spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display. ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐ pends on the set language. Where neces‐ sary, enter special characters via the con‐ troller. Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the navigation system and Internet sites. Function Controls Move interactive map or Internet sites. Swipe into re‐ spective direc‐ tion. Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on map or Internet sites. the touchpad with fingers. Display the menu or open Tap once. a link in the Internet. Changing settings You may change control display settings via touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly. Example: setting the clock Setting the clock On the Control Display: 1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐ played. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. ▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad. ▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad. ▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the upper area of the touchpad. 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date". Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 21 At a glance iDrive 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller. Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows. Radio symbols Symbol Meaning HD Radio station is being received. Telephone symbols 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. Symbol Meaning Incoming or outgoing call. Missed call. Wireless network reception strength. Symbol flashes: network search. Wireless network is not available. Bluetooth is switched on. Roaming is active. 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller. Text message was received. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller. Check the SIM card. SIM card is blocked. SIM card is missing. Status information Enter PIN. Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Entertainment symbols Symbol ▷ Time. ▷ Current entertainment source. ▷ Sound output, on/off. Meaning Music collection. Gracenote® database. ▷ Locating the vehicle. ▷ Wireless network reception strength. AUX-IN port. ▷ Phone status. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. 22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 iDrive Additional symbols Symbol Meaning At a glance 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content". 5. Select the desired menu item. Spoken instructions are turned off. Check the current vehicle position. Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the on-board comupter. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu. Switching the split screen on and off On the Control Display: 1. Press button. 2. "Split screen" Selecting the display On the Control Display: 1. Press button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected. Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ tions, phone numbers and menu entries. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. 2. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds. Running a function Press button. The function will work immediately. This means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected. Displaying the button assignment Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at top edge of screen. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 23 At a glance iDrive Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary. Deleting data Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐ trol Display. 1. Turn on operations. 2. "Settings" Deleting the button assignments 3. Open "Options". 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. five seconds. 4. "Delete personal data" 2. "OK" 6. "OK" Deleting personal in the vehicle Entering letters and numbers 5. "Continue" General information The concept On the Control Display: Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves personal data, such as stored radio stations. These personal data can be permanently de‐ leted through iDrive. 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ bers. General information 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing data can be deleted: ▷ Personal Profile settings. ▷ Stored radio stations. ▷ Stored Favorites buttons. ▷ Travel and computer information. ▷ Music collection. ▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. ▷ Phone book. ▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. ▷ Voice notes. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed. Symbol Function Press the controller: delete the let‐ ter or number. Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers. Switching between cases, letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can reel between entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers: ▷ Login accounts. ▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 30 minutes. 24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 iDrive Symbol At a glance Function Enter the letters. Enter the numbers. or Tip controller up. Without navigation system Select the symbol. Entry comparison Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐ rowed down with every letter entered and let‐ ters may be added automatically. Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during input for which data is available. ▷ Target search: names of locations may be entered in languages available through Control Display. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 25 At a glance Voice activation system Voice activation system Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system 1. Press button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command. A command that is recognized by the voice activation system is announced and dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The concept This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ cates that the voice activation system is active. ▷ Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice com‐ mands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input. If no other commands are available, use func‐ tion via iDrive. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the voice activation system. Briefly press the button on the steer‐ ing wheel or ›Cancel‹. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system. Terminating the voice activation system Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ fied. Set the language, refer to page 88. There are short commands for many functions. You may select lists such as phone lists via voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐ actly as they show in the respective list. Having possible commands read aloud You can have available commands read out loud for you: ›Voice commands‹ E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud. 26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Voice activation system Executing functions using short commands Execute functions on the main menu via short commands. It almost doesn't matter which menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ Additional commands for the help dialog: ▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ tion about the current operating options and the most important commands for them. ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced. One example: open the tone settings Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller. 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if needed. 2. Press button on the steering wheel. At a glance Setting the voice dialog Set system to standard dialog or use a short version. The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form. 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech type:" 4. Select setting. Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ struction until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use. Hints on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 196, close to the interior mirror. 3. ›Radio‹ 4. ›Tone‹ Via short command The desired tone settings can also be started via a short command. 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if needed. 2. Press button on the steering wheel. Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference. 3. ›Tone‹ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 27 At a glance Voice activation system ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. 28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Vehicle features and options Select components This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 1. Press button. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range: ▷ "Quick reference" ▷ "Search by pictures" ▷ "Owner's Manual" Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. It specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. Components of the Integrated Owner's Manual The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ mation or possible access. Quick Reference Guide The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ tion how to operate the car, how to use basic vehicle functions or what to do in case of a breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ played while driving. Leafing through the Owner's Manual Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed. Page by page without link access Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐ ping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to browse from page to page. Scroll back. Search by images Image search provides information and de‐ scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ ogy for a feature is not at hand. Scroll forward. Owner's Manual Search for information and descriptions by en‐ tering terms selected from the index. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 29 At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function You may open the relevant information di‐ rectly. Programmable memory buttons General information Opening via the iDrive The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly. To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the Options menu: Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive. 1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: 2. Press selected button for more than 2 seconds. Executing Press button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ mediately. "Display Owner's Manual" Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays: 1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual. 4. Press button again to return to last displayed function. 5. Press button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate permanently between the last dis‐ played function and the Owner's Manual re‐ peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time. 30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW eDRIVE At a glance BMW eDRIVE Vehicle features and options At a glance This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. BMW eDRIVE Special features of the BMW i High-voltage system This BMW i is an electric vehicle. The vehicle features a high-voltage system that consists of an electric motor and a high-voltage battery among other things. Optionally, the vehicle has a combustion engine that generates electrical energy via a generator and thereby increases the range. This combustion engine is called the Range Extender. 1 Vehicle battery 2 Fuel filler flap 3 High-voltage battery 4 Charging port 5 Drive unit The concept The vehicle can be operated completely emis‐ sions free using its electrical drive system. The special high-voltage battery supplies the electric motor as well as the comfort features with power. Carbon body The high-voltage battery is charged via a charging cable, e.g., when parked or while driv‐ ing by energy recovery. The vehicle consists of two different functional units: the drive module made from aluminum and the life module made from carbon fiber re‐ inforced plastic (carbon). Charging can be done especially quickly via special power connections. However, charging via conventional power supply - at home - is also possible. On the go, the energy recovery ensures that only little energy is lost when braking. When the vehicle decelerates, the electric mo‐ tor assumes the function of a generator and completely or partially converts the freed up motion energy into electrical power. As a result the high-voltage battery is partially recharged in order to reach maximum range. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 31 At a glance BMW eDRIVE An optional Range Extender can supply the drive system with power and thus increase the range of the vehicle. Functions Electric driving: eDRIVE Display The eDRIVE displays, refer to page 75, pro‐ vide information about the current state of the drive and visualize the system's use in a dia‐ gram. Maximize energy-saving driving and range The vehicle is powered exclusively by the elec‐ tric motor. The accelerator pedal can be used not just for acceleration, but also for decelera‐ tion. In this case, the electric motor works like a generator and charges the high voltage bat‐ tery. With a sensible driving style, this function can be used for especially efficient energy re‐ covery and comfortable driving, using just the accelerator pedal. Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequisite for as large a range as possible. eDRIVE pro‐ vides various functions that assist with an en‐ ergy-saving driving style and in the process help to monitor the range and if needed to in‐ crease it. The following instructions provide an overview of the available functions and the per‐ sonal measures. Coasting Before driving An especially efficient operating point is socalled coasting. In this case, the vehicle is de‐ celerated only by driving resistance and no en‐ ergy flows between high-voltage battery and electric motor. In order to coast, depress the accelerator pedal far enough that the mark in the instrument cluster, refer to page 75, is exactly in the center. eDRIVE allows using the air conditioner even before driving off. The stationary climate con‐ trol, refer to page 133, provides more range than full air conditioning while driving. Energy recovery: CHARGE The high-voltage battery is charged while driv‐ ing through energy recovery. The electric motor acts as a generator and converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electric current. Charging can take place in various situations while the vehicle is in motion: ▷ As soon as the gas pedal is only slightly depressed. ▷ During vehicle braking. The mark in the instrument cluster is located within the CHARGE range. Sensible driving and early speed reduction are important to make full use of the energy recov‐ ery feature. 32 Parked car ventilation during the charging process can provide maximum range when driving off. Trip planning and special functions of the navigation system Several special functions of the navigation sys‐ tem support trip planning taking into account the electric range: ▷ Range assistant, refer to Integrated Own‐ er's Manual. Checks whether an entered navigation destination can be reached. If the range is not sufficient, various recom‐ mendations to help increase the range are displayed automatically, e.g. an alternative ECO PRO route is displayed. ▷ Intermodal routing oder intermodal infor‐ mation, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual, as route criterion support trip planning using public transportation. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 BMW eDRIVE At a glance ▷ Range map indicates the action range on the navigation map, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual. ▷ Charging assistant under special destina‐ tions in navigation, helps to find and possi‐ bly include a public charging station in the desired route, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual. During driving ▷ General driving tips, refer to page 154, for increasing the range. ▷ Use the eDRIVE system efficiently, refer to page 148, for an optimized driving style. ▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to page 157, for driving style analysis. ▷ ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ mode, refer to page 155, for increasing the range. ▷ Display of the Fuel consumption history, refer to page 77. ▷ Display of secondary functions and the po‐ tential range, refer to page 78. After the trip ▷ Charge vehicle, refer to page 160, and plan next trip. ▷ Prepare for long downtimes, refer to page 203. BMW i Remote app A special BMW i Remote App allows to control and display certain vehicle functions using a smartphone. Safety information Read the information on safe handling of the high-voltage system, refer to page 34. Long-term Follow the instructions for vehicle storage and for longer idle periods, refer to page 203. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 33 At a glance Safety of the high-voltage system Safety of the high-voltage system Safety of the high-voltage system Working on the vehicle Maintenance and repairs Have maintenance and repair work per‐ formed only by a service center or a workshop that works according to BMW specifications with appropriately trained personnel. Other‐ wise, there is the risk of fatal injury from elec‐ trocution due to the high-voltage system's high voltage.◀ ▷ Liquid escapes in the trunk. In these cases there is no risk of injury from electrocution. Other damage to the vehicle is possible. High-voltage system: automatic deactivation If an accident occurs, the high-voltage system is switched off automatically to prevent risk of danger to occupants and other traffic. Read the information on What to do after an accident, refer to page 199. Body work and working on the high-volt‐ age system Do not perform any modifications or work on the vehicle, especially maintenance and repair work on the high-voltage system and the car‐ bon body and avoid retrofitting accessories. If work is not carried out properly, there is the risk of fire and fatal injury from electrocution due to the high-voltage system's high voltage. BMW recommends to have modifications and work on the vehicle only be carried out by an authorized BMW i service center or one that operates according to BMW i specifications with personnel trained accordingly.◀ Your vehicle's high-voltage system is a selfcontained system. Safety is ensured as long as no work is performed on technical components or on the chassis. High-voltage system: contact with water The high-voltage system is typically safe even in the following example situations: ▷ Water in the footwell, for instance after a rainstorm when sunroof was kept open. ▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the al‐ lowed height. 34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Safety of the high-voltage system Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 At a glance 35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle features and options At a glance This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Remote control/key General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with integrated key. Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐ tery. You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific ver‐ sion. For Settings, refer to page 48. 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Unlocking hood 4 ▷ With alarm system: panic mode ▷ Without panic mode: Adjustable function: headlight courtesy delay feature, stationary air condition‐ ing or unlock tailgate. Integrated key The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Personal Profile, refer to page 39. The remote controls hold information on re‐ quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ mote control, refer to page 188 Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐ row 2. The integrated key fits the driver's door lock. 38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Opening and closing Replacing the battery Controls ▷ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo‐ bile devices in the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed if one attempts to turn on the radio-ready state or ac‐ tivate engine readiness. Activation of drive readiness via emergency detection of the remote control 1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐ trol. 2. Raise the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up. 5. Press the cover closed. Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center. New remote controls New remote controls are available from the service center. Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be disabled by your service center. Emergency detection of remote control Also in the following situations, radio-ready state and drive readiness can be established: ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ mote control by external sources e.g., by radio masts. ▷ Empty battery in remote control. ▷ Interference from radio transmissions through mobile devices in close proximity to remote control. If a respective Check Control message ap‐ pears, hold the remote control with its back against the marked area on the steering col‐ umn. The BMW logo on the remote control should be at the same height as the marked area. Press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal. If the remote control is not recognized: slightly change the height position of the remote con‐ trol and repeat the procedure. Personal Profile The concept Personal Profile provides three profiles, using which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote control has one of these profiles assigned. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐ vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ tomatically applied. If several drivers use their own remote control, the vehicle will adjust the personal settings Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 39 Controls Opening and closing during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ stored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different remote control. Changes to the settings are automatically saved in the personal profile. Three personal profiles and a guest profile can be created. Adjusting The settings for the following systems and functions are saved in the active profile. The scope of storable settings is country- and equipment-dependable. ▷ Unlocking and locking. ▷ Lights. ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ mote control being used at the time. ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ ent remote control, this profile will apply to both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐ tiated anymore between the settings for the two remote controls. Renaming profiles A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ file to avoid confusion between the profiles. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Options" 4. "Rename current profile" ▷ Climate control. Resetting profiles ▷ Radio. ▷ Instrument cluster. The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values. ▷ Programmable memory buttons. 1. "Settings" ▷ Volumes, tone. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Control Display. 3. "Options" ▷ Navigation. 4. "Reset current profile" ▷ Park Distance Control PDC. ▷ Rearview camera Exporting profiles ▷ Driving Dynamics Control. Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐ ported. ▷ Cruise control. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐ other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ file function. ▷ Intelligent Safety. Profile management Opening profiles Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ ferent profile may be activated. The following export options are available: ▷ Via BMW Online. ▷ Via the USB port to a USB device. 1. "Settings" Popular file systems for USB devices are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐ 2. "Profiles" 3. Select a profile. ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile are automatically applied. 40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Opening and closing ommended formats for profile export. Other formats may not support the export. Controls 3. "Options" 4. "Display user list at startup" 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" Using the remote control 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Note USB interface: "USB device" Importing profiles Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be imported via BMW Online. Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ ported via the USB interface. Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ ported profile. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.◀ Unlocking Press button on the remote control. ▷ All doors and the tailgate are being un‐ locked. 3. "Import profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" USB interface: "USB device" Using the guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ files. This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" ▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐ vated. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually. ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this function was activated. ▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. For Settings, refer to page 48. The alarm system, refer to page 49, is dis‐ armed. Convenient opening 3. "Guest" The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the current remote control. Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start to select the desired profile. Press and hold this button on the re‐ mote control after unlocking. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 41 Controls Opening and closing Locking Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.◀ The driver's door must be closed. Press button on the remote control. All doors and the tailgate are being locked. The alarm system, refer to page 49, is armed. Switching on interior lights and courtesy lights Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually. If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐ tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the antitheft warning system, refer to page 50, are turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐ fore pressing the button again. Unlocking hood Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. Depending on the features and the country version, it is also possible to have door un‐ locked. Create the settings, refer to page 48. If the doors were not unlocked, the hood is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed. Do not place the remote control under the hood Take the remote control with you and do not leave it under the hood; otherwise, the remote control is locked inside the vehicle when the hood is closed.◀ 42 Without alarm system: unlocking the tailgate The Tailgate function must be set for the re‐ mote control button. For Settings, refer to page 48. Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of whether the vehicle was previously locked or unlocked. Depending on the features and the country version, it is also possible to have door un‐ locked. Create the settings, refer to page 48. If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is locked again as soon as it closes. Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀ Provide edge protection Sharp objects or those with edges can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heat conductors of the rear window. Pro‐ vide edge protection.◀ Without alarm system: switching the headlamp courtesy delay feature on The headlight courtesy delay feature function must be set for the remote control button. For Settings, refer to page 48. Briefly press the button on the remote control. The duration can be set in the Control Display. With alarm system: panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Opening and closing Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. To reel off the alarm: press any button. Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ lowing circumstances: ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to page 39. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices. In the case of interference, the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐ out remote control, refer to page 43. For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: Controls ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Without remote control From the outside Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.◀ Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.◀ Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key, refer to page 38. The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside. 1. Remove lid on the door lock. To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and unlock the lid. ▷ LX8766S. ▷ LX8766E. ▷ LX8CAS. ▷ LX8CAS2. ▷ MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 43 Controls Opening and closing 2. Unlock or lock door lock. The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off. In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on. Unlocking and opening ▷ Alarm system The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the door lock. Press the central locking system button to unlock the doors to‐ gether, and then pull the door handle above the armrest. ▷ Pull the door opener on the door to be opened. The other door remain locked. Rear doors In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or establish radioready state, if needed, through emergency de‐ tection of the remote control, refer to page 39. From the inside Unlocking and locking The rear doors can only be opened using the handle on the inside, arrow. The correspond‐ ing front door must be opened. To better reach the front door's handle fold the front seat's backrests, refer to page 54, down. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the front safety belt is completely wound up. Via the buttons for the central locking system. ▷ By pressing the button, the vehicle is locked with the doors closed. ▷ Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle. The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking. 44 When closing, make sure that the correspond‐ ing front door is far enough open. Hood Unlocking from the outside Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. The hood is unlocked and slightly raised. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Opening and closing As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ locked. Unlocking with the remote control, re‐ fer to page 42. Unlocking from the inside With the vehicle is stationary, press the button in the driver's footwell. The hood is unlocked and slightly raised. Controls Tailgate Opening The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Opening from the outside Manual release For example, in case of an electrical malfunc‐ tion. 1. Remove cover underneath the unlock but‐ tons. ▷ Press button next to the tailgate. ▷ 2. Remove wire cable and pull it back. The hood is unlocked and slightly raised. Opening 1. Press the release handle and open the hood. Without alarm system: press but‐ ton on the remote control for ap‐ prox. 1 second. The Tailgate function must be set for the remote control button. For Settings, refer to page 48. As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ locked. Unlocking with the remote control, refer to page 42. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐ ward. Opening from the inside With the vehicle is stationary, press the button in the driver's footwell. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 45 Controls Opening and closing Closing The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior. Hints Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ sult.◀ Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀ Provide edge protection Sharp objects or those with edges can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heat conductors of the rear window. Pro‐ vide edge protection.◀ Closing Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. ▷ Convenient closing. ▷ Separate unlocking of the tailgate. ▷ Establish drive readiness. Functional requirements ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ ence nearby. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle. ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. ▷ Drive readiness can only be established if the remote control is in the vehicle. Unlocking Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tail‐ gate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate. Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow. This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control. Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, such as in your pants pocket. 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Opening and closing Locking Controls Unlocking the tailgate separately Press button on tailgate's exterior Without alarm system: This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control , if the tailgate function is set. The situation of the doors does not change. Note the opening height of the tailgate Touch the surface on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐ ing the door handle. This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control. To save battery power, ensure that all power consumers are turned off before locking the vehicle. Convenient closing Monitor closing Monitor closing to ensure that no one becomes trapped.◀ The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀ Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ lowing circumstances: ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to page 39. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. Touch the surface on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle. This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors fold in. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 43. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 47 Controls Opening and closing Adjusting ▷ "Tailgate" Unlocking ▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" The tailgate is unlocked. The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 39. Doors Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings" The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 39. 2. "Doors/key" Select the symbol. 3. The tailgate and the doors are un‐ locked. 1. "Settings" 4. Select the desired function: ▷ "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door is unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehi‐ cle. 2. "Doors/key" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ mation signals. ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" ▷ "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked. Automatic locking The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 39. Hood Depending on optional features and country version, this setting is not offered in some cases. 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select the desired function: 1. "Settings" ▷ "Lock if no door is opened" 2. "Doors/key" 3. The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened. Select the symbol. 4. Select the desired function: ▷ "Front compartment lid" The hood is unlocked. ▷ "Front lid and door(s)" The hood and the doors are unlocked. Without alarm system: tailgate Without alarm system: headlamp courtesy delay feature/standing climate control The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 39. Depending on optional features and country version, this setting is not offered in some cases. 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 4. Select the desired function: 2. "Doors/key" 3. 3. Select the symbol. ▷ "Pathway lighting" Select the symbol. 4. Select the desired function: 48 2. "Doors/key" Headlight courtesy delay feature ▷ "Comfort climate control" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Opening and closing Stationary climate control Controls Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. Alarm system To switch off the alarm: press any button. The concept Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system responds to: ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate. ▷ Movements in the interior. ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ tempts at stealing a wheel. ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. The alarm system briefly signals tampering: ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ tem. ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. Arming and disarming the alarm system ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ cured. When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at the same time. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. Door lock and armed alarm system When the still open access is closed, inte‐ rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. Tailgate and armed alarm system The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is armed. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again when the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the radio-ready state is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. Tilt alarm sensor Panic mode The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 49 Controls Opening and closing Interior motion sensor Power windows The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. Hint Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: ▷ In automatic car washes. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not operate the power windows and injure themselves.◀ ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ cles, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ With animals in the vehicle. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked again. Opening ▷ The window opens while the switch is held. ▷ Switching off the alarm ▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or establish radio-ready state, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, refer to page 39. ▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the remote control on your person, grasp the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely. Press the button to the resistance point. Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stopse the motion. See also: Convenient opening, refer to page 41, via remote control. Closing Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held. 50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Opening and closing ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically. Pulling again stops the motion. See also: closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to page 46. Pinch protection system Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ tection Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ Controls Glass sunroof, powered General information The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ tion is switched on. Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ erwise, injuries may result.◀ Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐ selves.◀ No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the win‐ dow's range of movement; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a window closes, closing is interrupted. The window reopens slightly. Closing without the pinch protection system Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐ vent window from closing properly - proceed as follows: 1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and hold it there. The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin. 2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without jam protection. Tilting the glass sunroof Push switch briefly upward. ▷ The closed glass sunroof is tilted. ▷ The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor does not move. Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together ▷ Press the reel in the desired direction to the resistance point and hold it there. The glass sunroof moves as long as the reel is held down. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 51 Controls Opening and closing ▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past the resistance point. The glass sunroof moves automatically. Pressing the reel upward stops the motion. ▷ Open and close the sliding visors manually. Additional options: ▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 41, via the remote control. ▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to page 46. Comfort position If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐ pletely opened, the comfort position has been attained. In this position the wind noises in the interior are the least. If desired, continue the movement by pressing the reel. Pinch protection system If the glass sunroof while closing exceeds a certain value, the closing operation is inter‐ rupted at roughly the center of the roof open‐ ing. The glass sunroof reopens slightly. Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ tection Despite the pinch protection system, check that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐ rupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.◀ Closing from the open position without pinch protection E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as follows: The pinch protection is limited and the glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin. 2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐ sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐ roof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear. Closing from the raised position without pinch protection If there is an external danger, push the reel for‐ ward past the resistance point and hold it. The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐ tion. Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and drive readiness is established. During the initialization, the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ erwise, injuries may result.◀ Press the reel up and hold it until the initialization is complete: ▷ Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is com‐ pleted when the glass sun‐ roof is completely closed. ▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐ tection. 1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐ ance point and hold. 52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Adjusting Controls Adjusting Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀ Adjusting seats At a glance Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 55. ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 56. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 93. 1 Forward/backward 53 2 Height 54 3 Backrest tilt 54 Forward/backward Seats Hints Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀ Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally pro‐ vided by the belt.◀ Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ ward or back slightly making sure it engages properly. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 53 Controls Adjusting Height Fold down seat back 1. Pull lever up to the stop. Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary. 2. Fold backrest forward. Backrest tilt Backrest returns to its initial position after re‐ lease. Front seat heating Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary. Switching on Backrest Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level. Note Folding back and locking the backrest Before driving off, fold back and lock the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.◀ The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the journey is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ ically with the temperature selected last. If ECO PRO+, refer to page 155, is activated, the seat heating is deactivated. Switch off Press button longer. The LEDs go out. 54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Adjusting Safety belts Controls Buckling the belt Seats with safety belt The vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt. General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. For the occupants' safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. Unbuckling the belt The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. Hints One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐ jure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable objects, or be pinched.◀ What reduces the restraining effect Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the restraining effect is reduced.◀ 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐ nism. Safety belt reminder for driver's and passenger's seat The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ nal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Damage to safety belts Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ aged otherwise: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked. Check and replace safety belts This should only be done by your service center; otherwise, this safety feature might not work properly.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 55 Controls Adjusting Front head restraints Folding down head restraints Extending/retracting head restraint Distance The spacing is adjusted to the back of the head using the incline of the seat backrest. Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐ sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted headrests again if passengers are being car‐ ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀ Removing The head restraints cannot be removed. Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀ Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level. ▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2. ▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints. Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. Fold the seat down, refer to page 142, before removing the head restraint, otherwise the head restraint cannot be removed. Adjusting the height 1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ sistance. ▷ To raise: push. ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push headrest down. 56 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐ straint out completely. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Adjusting Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀ Controls Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch. Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc‐ tion in which the button is pressed. Mirrors Exterior mirrors Adjusting manually General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ ror setting is stored for the profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ mote control, the position is automatically re‐ trieved if this function is active. Note Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.◀ In case of electrical malfunction press edges of mirror. Automatic Curb Monitor The concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g. Activating 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. 2. Engage selector lever position R. Deactivating At a glance Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position. Automatic cornering adjustment The concept During right-hand turns, the mirror glass is turned. Provides a better view of the vehicle sideways. Note 1 Adjusting 57 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor, Auto‐ matic cornering adjustment 3 Fold in and out 58 Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 57 Controls Adjusting Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible depending on the situa‐ tion.◀ Automatic dimming feature Requirements Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable ▷ Vehicle moving. ▷ Speed less than 12 mph/20 km/h. ▷ Turn signal is set. Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ med. Photocells are used to control the Interior rearview mirror, refer to page 58. Flip lever Activating Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position. Fold in and out Press button. Possible at speeds up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. E. g. this is advantageous To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rear view mirror, flip the lever forward. Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature The concept ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. ▷ For folding mirrors back out that were folded away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.◀ ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the back of the mirror. Functional requirement For proper operation: Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever drive readiness is switched on. 58 Photocells are used for control: ▷ Keep the photocells clean. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Adjusting Controls ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield. Steering wheel Note Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀ Adjusting 1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 59 Controls Transporting children safely Transporting children safely Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. The right place for children Note Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.◀ Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Transporting children in the rear Deactivating the front-seat passenger airbags If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ Installing child restraint systems Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident. Hints Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight and size.◀ To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐ tems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐ tive effect can be lost.◀ Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ straint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ ger airbags, refer to page 95. 60 Manufacturer's information for child re‐ straint systems Ensuring the stability of the child seat When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Transporting children safely of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ rest.◀ Controls Child seat security On the front passenger seat Deactivating airbags Deactivating the front-seat passenger airbags If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 95. Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ ble and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐ dent. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐ til the best possible belt guide position is reached. The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ ten child restraint systems. The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐ nently locked to fasten child restraint systems. Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the strap completely. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the belt. 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked. Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint system. 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely. LATCH child restraint system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ dren. Note Follow manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint systems, observe the operating and safety in‐ formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 61 Controls Transporting children safely erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ duced.◀ Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Mounting points The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses. The respective symbol shows the an‐ chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf. Note Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐ chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐ duced.◀ Note Mounting eyelets Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐ per retaining strap to secure child restraint systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.◀ Retaining strap guide Position The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐ bols. It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the middle seat. Retaining strap Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not passed over the head restraints or sharp edges and is not twisted up to the upper mounting points; otherwise, the belt cannot properly secure the child restraint system in an accident.◀ Before installing LATCH child restraint systems Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐ straint system. Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems 1 Direction of travel 1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to the user's manual of the system. 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected. 4 Mounting point/eye 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap 62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Transporting children safely Controls Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Raise the head restraint if needed. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint. 3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the backrest and the cargo cover. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 63 Controls Driving Driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Start/Stop button Overview Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches drive readiness back off and radio-ready state is switched back on. Radio ready state Some electronic systems/power consumers are ready for operation. The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐ cally: ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ tral locking system. ▷ If the charging state of the batteries is low. The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., the drive readiness is automatically switched off for the following reasons: Button in the vehicle ▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. ▷ When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights. Radio ready state is switched back on if the on/off button on the radio is pressed when the vehicle is parked. 1 Start/Stop button 2 Park P 3 Selector lever Operating readiness All electronic systems/power consumers are ready for operation. Odometer and trip odome‐ ter are displayed in the instrument cluster. The concept Pressing the Start/Stop button switches drive readiness on or off. Drive readiness starts with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. 64 To preserve the battery, use operating readi‐ ness and activated power features only as long as absolutely necessary. Operating readiness is switched off: ▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are activated. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are turned off. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving Controls ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off. Drive readiness in detail ▷ When the batteries' state of charge is low, if the low beams are turned off. Hints ▷ The low beams switch to parking lights af‐ ter approx. 15 minutes of no use. Drive readiness If drive readiness is switched on, the vehicle ready to drive and the READY signal, refer to page 65, is displayed in the instrument clus‐ ter. Do not leave the vehicle unattended Do not leave the vehicle unattended with drive readiness switched on; otherwise, it may pose a risk.◀ Before leaving the vehicle All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Before leaving the vehicle, with drive readiness switched on engage lever in position P P and set the parking brake; otherwise, the vehicle is not secured against rolling away.◀ Most of the indicator and warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time. 1. Close the driver's door. Switching on drive readiness Activated drive readiness is the equivalent of a running engine in conventional vehicles. Deac‐ tivated engine readiness is equivalent to switching the ignition off. 2. Depress the brake pedal. To save battery power when parking, switch off drive readiness and any unnecessary elec‐ tronic systems/power consumers. Display in the instrument cluster Drive readiness is switched off automatically: ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled. Note 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Drive readiness is switched on. The READY display indicates that the vehicle is ready for driv‐ ing. Display on the Start/Stop button If drive readiness is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio-ready state when the door is opened and the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, or if the lights are turned off or the daytime running lights are ac‐ tivated. General information Selector lever position P with drive readi‐ ness switched off When drive readiness is switched off, selector lever position P is automatically engaged. When in an automatic car wash, e.g., ensure that the drive readiness is not switched off ac‐ cidentally, otherwise, wheels can lock up.◀ Drive readiness is also displayed through light indicators on the Start/Stop button. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 65 Controls Driving Lighting pulses orange Selector lever positions ▷ After unlocking and opening the door. ▷ After switching off drive readiness. When the brake pedal is depressed, the light‐ ing becomes more intense. Lighting lights up steady blue After drive readiness is switched on, light turns blue. The vehicle is ready to drive. The READY indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. In addition, a signal sounds. The engaged selector lever position is dis‐ played on the selector lever. Lighting off Drive readiness, operating readiness and radio-ready state are turned off. The vehicle is in the idle state. The charging cable may be connected. D Drive Position for normal vehicle operation. R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Driving off N is Neutral Requirements Driving is possible under the following condi‐ tions: ▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged. ▷ The driver's door is closed. Driving 1. Switch on drive readiness. 2. Apply the brake and engage lever in posi‐ tion P D or R. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive. Use in automatic car washes, e.g. The vehicle may roll. P Park Engage only while the vehicle is stationary and the brake is applied. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: ▷ If the belt on the driver's seat is off, the driver's door is open and neither brake nor accelerator pedal are depressed while drive readiness is switched on and selector lever position D or R is set. ▷ After switching off drive readiness via the Start/Stop button, if selector lever posi‐ tion D or R is set. ▷ With operating readiness turned off. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐ lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐ hicle may begin to move. On uphill slopes, also Set parking brake, refer to page 70. 66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving Engaging selector lever positions General information ▷ Interlock: the selector lever position P can be exited only with drive readiness en‐ gaged. ▷ Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed. Controls Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from the danger area. Engaging selector lever position N 1. Press and hold the Start/Stop button. 2. Depress the brake pedal. ▷ Shift lock: before shifting out of P, remove the charging cable from the vehicle; other‐ wise, the shift command will not be exe‐ cuted. 3. Turn and hold the selector lever in posi‐ tion N. Engaging N, D, R 4. Turn the selector lever again into posi‐ tion N within approx. 2 seconds. A corresponding Check Control message is displayed. Position N is indicated on the selector lever. 5. Release Start/Stop button and brake. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own. Switch off drive readiness Turn the selector lever in the desired direction. The engaged selector lever position is dis‐ played on the selector lever. Engaging P Park the car. Noises from the electrical system such as for cooling the high-voltage system might still be audible. After stopping the vehicle: 1. Apply brake and engage lever in position P P. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The READY indicator goes out and a signal sounds. In case of longer idle times, follow the in‐ structions in the Care chapter, refer to page 203. Press button P. Before driving into a car wash So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ serve instructions for going into an automatic car wash, refer to page 200. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 67 Controls Driving Driving in detail: eDRIVE Hints Awareness of vehicle reduced when driven in electric mode When driving in electric mode, note that, due to the lack of engine noise, pedestrians and other traffic might pay less attention to the ve‐ hicle due to missing engine noises. Please take special care when parking or leaving a parking space.◀ Cautiously remove your foot from the ac‐ celerator pedal Cautiously remove your foot from the acceler‐ ator pedal because the braking effect of the electric motor can be stronger than with a combustion engine. Otherwise, abrupt braking and slow-down may confuse other traffic.◀ Accelerator pedal positions ally, the brake lights will come on without hit‐ ting the brakes. Energy recovery: CHARGE The high-voltage battery is recharged in part through energy recovery. The electric motor acts as a generator when decelerating and converts the kinetic energy into electrical en‐ ergy. Energy can be recovered if the following condi‐ tions are met: ▷ The vehicle is moving. ▷ Speed higher than approx. 12 mph/20 km/h. ▷ Selector lever position D or R is set. ▷ Gas pedal is not actuated or only pressed down 1/3 of the way. Energy cannot be recovered in the following situations: ▷ Selector lever position N is set. ▷ While drive stability control systems, e.g. DTC, are active and control the vehicle, even though this is not indicated by an in‐ dicator light. ▷ The high-voltage battery is fully charged. ▷ When temperature of the high-voltage bat‐ tery is very low or very high. In winter it might be possible that the en‐ ergy recovery is temporarily unavailable af‐ ter startup. 1 Deceleration 2 Coasting 3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePOWER Deceleration The deceleration depends on the position of the accelerator pedal. The less the actuation of the accelerator pedal, the greater the decelera‐ tion. In this way energy is recovered and the high-voltage battery is charged. Releasing the accelerator pedal causes decel‐ eration similar to cautious braking. Addition‐ 68 Always be ready to apply the brake Always be ready to apply the brake, be‐ cause without energy recovery there is also no braking action through the electric drive unit. The vehicle could roll further than anticipated. This may constitute a danger for other traffic.◀ Exemplary traffic situations If a deceleration operation is foreseeable while driving, this can be used for energy recovery. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving The following exemplary driving situations may show that: ▷ Decelerating downhill. ▷ Deceleration before a red light. Avoid late or abrupt braking. Instead, deceler‐ ate the vehicle using energy recovery. Coasting The electric drive makes it possible to roll with‐ out consuming energy. This driving condition is referred to as coasting. Proactive driving reduces energy consumption and increases the range. Controls Automatic maintenance run To ensure that the Range Extender functions properly even during longer periods of nonuse, the Range Extender is automatically acti‐ vated for a few minutes at certain intervals dur‐ ing the trip. Respective Check Control messages indicate the dry run. Should that oc‐ cur at an unfavorable time you may cancel the dry run by pressing the Start/Stop button. It postpones the dry run. Should the high-voltage battery be fully charged or if there is not enough gas in the tank then a dry run will not be executed. With vehicle rolling, no energy is recovered. Heavily discharged high-voltage battery Exemplary traffic situations If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐ charged during the trip, the performance and some comfort features are reduced step-bystep to extend the range. If a route can be traveled without anticipated need for braking, it is advantageous to roll. The following exemplary driving situations may show that: ▷ Rolling on a straight downhill route without obstacles. ▷ Coasting on a route without obstacles. Avoid late or abrupt braking. Range Extender Increase range Heated high-voltage battery With a stationary dirt In exceptional cases, it is possible that the high-voltage battery heats up sharply when the vehicle is stationary. E. g. with extreme exter‐ nal temperatures and direct solar radiation. With a overheated high-voltage battery, drive readiness cannot be switched on. If the charging state of the high-voltage battery drops during travel to a minimum value, the Range Extender starts and supplies the re‐ quired electrical energy for driving on. A Check Control message is displayed. The symbol on the charging state indicator designates a Range Extender reel-on time. While driving The Range Extender controls its output auto‐ matically, turns itself off and restarts according to the driving situation. The high-voltage battery will not be charged by the Range Extender. Another message will indicate when drive readiness is available again. If the high-voltage battery overheats during the trip, the performance is reduced step-by-step in order to cool down the battery. The ePO‐ WER performance display in the instrument cluster returns in the process. When tempera‐ ture increases further, park the vehicle until the high-voltage batter has cooled down. Should the performance display fall to 0, drive readi‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 69 Controls Driving ness is switched off and the vehicle comes to a stop. While driving Use as emergency brake while driving: Pull the reel and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the reel is being pulled. Parking brake The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐ nal sounds and the brake lights light up. The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐ cle from rolling when it is parked. A Check Control message is displayed. If the vehicle is slowed down down to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set. Overview Releasing With drive readiness switched on: Press the reel while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. The LED and indicator lamp go out. The parking brake is released. Parking brake Automatic release Setting Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed. Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.◀ Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not release the parking brake.◀ Pull the reel. The LED lights up. The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set. 70 For automatic release, step on the accelerator pedal. The LED and indicator lamp go out. The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator: ▷ Drive readiness switched on. ▷ Drive mode engaged. ▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed. Inadvertent operation of the accelerator pedal Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐ erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is set in motion and there is a risk of an acci‐ dent.◀ Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving After a power failure Putting the parking brake into operation 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the reel while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation. Any sounds associated with this are normal. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation. Controls Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher Turn signal Hints Do not adjust the exterior mirrors Do not adjust the exterior mirror while driving and when turn signals/hazard warning flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐ nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐ tion and can't be seen.◀ Using turn signals Hold function The concept The system holds the vehicle automatically when gear is engaged. This prevents rolling against the direction of travel. In selector lever position D, the vehicle cannot roll backwards. In selector lever position R, it cannot roll forward. The brake pedal does not have to be pressed. Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Hints To reduce energy consumption when the hold function is activated, activate the parking brake or engage lever in position P P when the vehi‐ cle is stopped for long periods of time. The hold function can be by the vehicle's load and the road incline. If needed a Check Control message will appear and position P will be se‐ lected automatically. Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 71 Controls Driving Signaling briefly Switching on Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. High beams, headlight flasher Push wiper lever up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once. ▷ High beams, arrow 1. ▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2. Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐ hicle comes to standstill. Switch off and brief wipe Hints Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐ shield Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀ Do not activate wipers on dry windshield Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.◀ Push wiper lever down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Single wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving Interval mode or rain sensor Controls Clean the windshield The concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror. Activating/deactivating Pull the wiper lever towards you. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Press button on the wiper lever. Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up. When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐ intentional wiping can cause damages.◀ Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn the thumbwheel. Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze onto the windshield which might impede your viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; operation might damage pump.◀ Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ cally heated while operating readiness is switched on. Rear window wiper Switching on the rear window wiper Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward, arrow 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 73 Controls Driving Cleaning rear window In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐ row 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle po‐ sition when released. Fold-out position of the wipers Fold wipers back when you want to change the blades or with pending low temperatures. 1. Switch operating readiness on and off again. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ centrate or the equivalent.◀ Washer fluid reservoir 2. With icy conditions make sure that blades are not frozen to the windshield. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. Folding wipers back down Before switching operating readiness on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the wipers may become damaged when they are activated.◀ 1. Turn on operations. 2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation. Washer fluid All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ centrate and tap water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ turer's recommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the right mixture. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system. Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ ferent manufacturers because they can clog the windshield washer nozzles. Hints Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injury if it is used incorrectly. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter. Therefore, keep it away from possible sources of ignition. 74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Displays Controls Displays Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Instrument cluster The concept The instrument cluster is a variable display. Some of the displays in the instrument cluster may differ from the way they are shown in this Owner's Handbook. At a glance 1 Computer 86 7 Driving Dynamics Control program 108 2 Driver assistance systems 8 Range for electric driving 83 3 Speedometer 9 Battery charge indicator 77 4 Drive readiness indicator 65 10 Performance display 77 5 ECO PRO tips 155 6 Trip odometer 82 Selection list, such as for the radio 85 11 Range Extender range 83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 75 Controls Displays 12 Range Extender fuel gauge 82 14 Display, drive mode 66 13 Messages, e.g. Check Control Charging screen 1 Charging status 166 5 Range for electric driving 166 2 End of charging time 166 6 Charging state 77 Departure time with timer 167 7 Range Extender range 83 3 Maximum electrical range 166 8 With Range Extender: fuel gauge 82 4 Stationary climate control 167 Displaying the eDRIVE system Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Electric driving: ePOWER. ▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE. ▷ Drive readiness: READY. The concept The display depends on the system's operat‐ ing condition. The following functions of the eDRIVE system are shown in the instrument cluster: ▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator. 76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Displays High-voltage battery charge indicator High voltage Even if no fill level bars are displayed next to the battery symbol, the high-voltage system is still under high voltage.◀ The fill level bars indicate the available charg‐ ing state of the high-voltage battery when op‐ erating readiness and drive readiness are switched on. With a low range the color of the charging sta‐ tus indicator switches from blue to yellow. In addition, the range for electric driving is dis‐ played. With Range Extender: maintaining charging state Controls Performance display The accelerator pedal indicator in the perform‐ ance display indicates the current efficiency of the driving style. The efficient range of the per‐ formance display is colored blue. Accelerator pedal indicator in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by coasting or when decelerating. Accelerator pedal indicator in the ePOWER range, arrow 2: display when accelerating. Use eDRIVE efficiently, refer to page 148. Drive readiness: READY The READY display indicates that the vehicle is ready for driv‐ ing. Drive readiness in detail, re‐ fer to page 65. Indications on the Control Display Fuel consumption history The arrow on the charging state indicator designates the Range Extender reel-on time. If Range Extender is activated, the current charging state of the high-voltage battery is maintained. ▷ Gray arrow: Range Extender deactivated. ▷ White arrow: Range Extender activated. The top bars indicate the average energy con‐ sumed while driving time, arrow 1. The lower Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 77 Controls Displays bars indicate the average energy recovered while driving time, arrow 2. ▷ Blue: electrical energy ▷ White: activated secondary functions. One bar indicates one minute. The eDRIVE system's average fuel consump‐ tion is indicated by a line above the bar display and as a value on the right next to the graph. Displaying fuel consumption history Displaying energy distribution 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "eDRIVE" 3. "Comfort information" 1. "Vehicle info" Check Control 2. "eDRIVE" "CHARGE" 3. The concept Energy flow of the eDRIVE system The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ play. The display shows the active components of the eDRIVE system: ▷ Blue: electrical energy. ▷ Arrow: direction of the energy flow. ▷ Segments of the high-voltage battery sym‐ bolize the charging state. Indicator/warning lights General information The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ nations and colors. ▷ The operating states are displayed: "ePOWER", "CHARGE". Several lights indicate function checks and light up only temporarily when drive readiness or operating readiness are activated. ▷ Interior cooling/heating function switched on. Red lights Displaying the energy flow Safety belt reminder 1. "Vehicle info" Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. 2. "eDRIVE" 3. "Energy flow" Energy distribution Beside the current range the display shows the energy distribution and the potential range if individual secondary functions are turned off. 78 Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Displays Controls Orange lights Airbag system Airbag system and belt tensioner are defective. Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ ice center immediately. Parking brake The parking brake is set. For additional information, refer to Release parking brake, refer to page 70. Brake system Continue to drive moderately. Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ ice center immediately. Front-end collision warning Illuminated: advance warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ ger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Increase distance. Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed. Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ neuver. Pedestrian warning If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds. Active Cruise Control The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead. For additional information, refer to Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC, refer to page 110. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐ tected. Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐ quate for operating the system. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Yellow lights Anti-lock Braking System ABS Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐ ing force boost in some cases defec‐ tive. Stop carefully. Take into account longer brake travel. Have this checked by the service center immediately. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Flashing: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐ lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving profile to the driving circumstances. Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system checked by the service center. For additional information, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC, refer to page 107. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 79 Controls Displays DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol DTC is switched on. For additional information, refer to Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 107, and Dy‐ namic Traction Control, refer to page 108. Flat Tire Monitor FTM The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cau‐ tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐ neuvers. For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐ fer to page 99. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected. ▷ Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. ▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform the reset of the system again. ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if needed. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center. For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor, refer to page 96. 80 Steering system Steering system in some cases defec‐ tive. Have the steering system checked by the service center. Engine functions Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ ice center. For additional information, refer to Onboard Diagnostics socket, refer to page 189. Green lights Turn signal Turn signal on. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. For additional information, refer to Turn signal, refer to page 71. Parking lights, headlight control Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ vated. For additional information, refer to Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐ fer to page 90. Cruise control The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the con‐ trol elements on the steering wheel. Blue lights High beams High beams are activated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Displays For additional information, refer to High beams, refer to page 72. Controls Hiding Check Control messages General lamps Check Control At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored. The symbol is shown in the display of the instrument cluster. Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lights. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ sages are displayed consecutively. Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display. Symbols Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. ▷ "Owner's Manual" Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual. ▷ "Service request" Contact your service center. ▷ "Roadside Assistance" Contact Roadside Assistance. These messages can be faded for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ played again automatically. ▷ Other Check Control messages are faded automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later. Displaying stored Check Control messages On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message. Messages after trip completion Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after drive readiness is switched off. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 81 Controls Displays With Range Extender: fuel gauge The fill level bars indicate the available fuel supply of the Range Extender when operating readiness and drive readiness are switched on. Additional range of the Range Extender on top of pure electric range. If the Range Extender is activated, the color of the fill level bar indicator switches from gray to white. Odometer and trip odometer Display ▷ Odometer, arrow 1, Scope of the on-board computer, refer to page 86. ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. Show/reset kilometers: TRIP Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary. Hints on refueling, refer to page 169. Coolant temperature If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. Check the coolant level, refer to page 186. Press the knob. ▷ With operating readiness turned off, the time, the external temperature and the od‐ ometer are displayed. ▷ When operating readiness is switched on, the trip odometer is reset. External temperature If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads. 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Displays Controls Hints Ice on roads Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk of an accident.◀ Time Observe range Always make sure that the range is suffi‐ cient for the planned trip. The range is dynamic and can abruptly change.◀ Increase range, refer to page 148. Service requirements The time is displayed in the computer. Setting the time and time format, refer to page 88. Range The expected range for the energy stored in the high-voltage battery is displayed on the right side of the instrument cluster next to the charging state indicator of the high-voltage battery. With Range Extender: The range of the Range Extender is displayed separately next to the fuel gauge. The total range can be displayed via the on-board com‐ puter. Expanding the range with Range Ex‐ tender, refer to page 69. Two Check Control messages indicate a lim‐ ited range. The range display is dynamic. The range can be abruptly reduced or in‐ creased based on the following factors: ▷ Driving style. The concept The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in the instrument cluster after operating readi‐ ness is switched on. Your service specialist can read the current service requirements from your remote con‐ trol. Display Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date. Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" ▷ Traffic conditions. ▷ Program change via Driving Dynamics Control. ▷ Climate and terrain conditions. ▷ Automatic climate control settings. 3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed. 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. ▷ After determination of a route by the navi‐ gation system. ▷ When exiting a route or recalculating a route. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 83 Controls Displays Speed limit detection Symbols Sym‐ bols Description The concept No service is currently required. The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tion is approaching. The service deadline has already passed. Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. On the Control Display: Hints 1. "Vehicle info" Personal judgment 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Speed limit detection Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera in the area of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐ head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐ bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐ tected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also dis‐ plays speed limits present on routes without signs. "Service required" 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system assists the driver and does not re‐ place the human eye.◀ 5. "Date:" 6. Adjust the settings. 7. Confirm. The entered date is stored. Automatic Service Request At a glance Camera Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request" 84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Displays Controls Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. Switching on/off ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "Speed limit information" If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ ment cluster. Display The following is displayed in the instrument cluster: Speed limit detection Current speed limit. Speed limit detection is not available. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the following can be displayed or operated us‐ ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel and the display in the instru‐ ment cluster: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Redial phone feature. ▷ Turn on voice activation system. It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐ namics Control. System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered by a sticker, etc. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 85 Controls Displays Display Calling up information on the info display Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the illustration shown. Activating a list and adjusting the setting Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed in the info display of the instrument cluster. Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the info display: ▷ Kilometers. ▷ With Range Extender: total range ▷ Average fuel consumption. ▷ Current fuel consumption. On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel. ▷ Average speed. ▷ External temperature. ▷ Time. ▷ Speed limit detection. Adjusting displays for computer On-board computer Display in the instrument cluster The information from the computer is shown in the upper left area of the instrument cluster. You can select what information from the com‐ puter is to be displayed in the instrument clus‐ ter. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. Select the desired displays. 86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Displays Information in detail With Range Extender: total range The total range considers the capacity of the fuel tank as well as the electric energy in the high-voltage battery. Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated on the basis of various distances. Standstill with drive readiness turned off is not considered. Current fuel consumption Controls 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset. "Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a standstill. Display on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" Resetting the fuel consumption or speed Displays the current energy consumption. The efficiency of the driving can be monitored. On the Control Display: Average speed 2. "Onboard info" Periods when vehicle is parked with drive read‐ iness switched off are not included when cal‐ culating average speed. 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" Resetting average values Speed warning Press and hold the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. The concept Speed limit detection Displays a speed, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 84, function. Trip computer 1. "Vehicle info" 4. "Yes" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h. The vehicle features two types of board com‐ puters. Displaying, setting or changing the speed warning ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary. On the Control Display: ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip. Resetting the trip computer On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed. 5. Press the controller. Speed warning is stored. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 87 Controls Displays Activating/deactivating the speed warning 3. "Format:" On the Control Display: The time format is stored. 1. "Settings" 4. Select the desired format. Automatic time setting 2. "Speed" Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are updated automatically. 3. "Warning" 4. Press the controller. Setting your current speed as the speed warning 1. "Settings" On the Control Display: 3. "Auto time set" 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" Date 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" Setting the date 4. Press the controller. 1. "Settings" The current vehicle speed is stored as the speed warning. Settings on the Control Display Time 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month and year. The date is stored. Setting the time Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time:" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed. 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. 5. Press the controller. The date format is stored. 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ nutes are displayed. Language 7. Press the controller. Setting the language The time is stored. To set the language on the Control Display: Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Language:" 4. Select the desired language. 88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Displays Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Controls 2. "GPS tracking" 3. "GPS tracking" Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 27. Units of measure Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature: 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Brightness Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 5. Press the controller. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible. Activating/deactivating display of the current vehicle position If GPS geolocation has been activated, the cur‐ rent vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW i Remote App or in the ConnectedDrive customer portal. 1. "Settings" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 89 Controls Lights Lights Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. With driver's door open and operating readi‐ ness turned off, the exterior lighting will be turned off automatically. Parking lights Position of switch : the vehicle's lights light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and disable drive readiness. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to page 91. Overview Low beams with operating readi‐ Position of switch ness switched on: the low beams light up. Welcome lights 1 Rear fog lights When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in position or : parking and interior lights come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked depending on the ambient brightness. 2 Depending on the equipment: automatic headlamp control, welcome lamps, day‐ time running lights On the Control Display: 3 Lights off, daytime running lights 1. "Settings" 4 Parking lights / daytime running lights 2. "Lighting" 5 Low beams/welcome lights 3. "Welcome lights" 6 Headlight range control 7 Instrument lighting Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Activating/deactivating Headlight courtesy delay feature Parking lights/low beams, headlight control The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the radioready state is switched off. General information Position of switch: 90 , , Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Lights Controls Setting the duration 2. "Lighting" On the Control Display: 3. "Daytime running lamps" 1. "Settings" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway lighting:" Roadside parking lights 4. Set length of time. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Automatic headlight control Position of switch : the low beams are acti‐ vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. Personal responsibility The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ ment in determining when to turn the lights on in response to ambient lighting conditions. E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these conditions, you should always switch on the lights manually.◀ Daytime running lights With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ ning lights light up in position , or . After operating readiness is switched off, the parking lights light up in position . Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ vate the daytime running lights. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. Switching on With operating readiness switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Switch off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. Instrument lighting Adjusting The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel. Interior lights General information The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐ cally. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 91 Controls Lights Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ trols brightness of some of these features. Overview With a color scheme selected and welcome lights activated they illuminate in the line's color when vehicle is unlocked. Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐ justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 1 Interior lights 2 Reading lamp 4. Adjust the brightness. Switching the interior lights on and off Press button. To reel off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button. Reading lights Press button. Reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light. Ambient light Depending on your optional features lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the interior. Selecting color scheme On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" 4. Select desired setting. To deactivate the ambient light: "Off". 92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Safety Controls Safety Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Airbags 1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbag Front airbags Side airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate restraint. In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area. Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 93 Controls Safety Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact. Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions. Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered. ▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐ jects between an airbag and a person. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ tach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS devices or' mobile phones. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries might occur when front airbag is activated. ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries might occur when airbag is activated. ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. 94 ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way. ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the roofliner.◀ Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals. Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐ ploying the airbags Do not touch the individual components imme‐ diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, you may risk burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the service center or an authorized repair shop for handling explosives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tem could lead to failure in an emergency or unintentional activation of the airbag - both may lead to injury.◀ Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. Functional readiness of the airbag system With operating readiness turned on warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly indicating airbag sys‐ tem and belt tension are functional. Airbag system malfunctioning ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when op‐ erating readiness is turned on. ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Safety In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐ tem checked immediately. In case of a malfunction have airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in case of a severe accident.◀ Controls ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by your vehicle's manufacturer. ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it. Automatic deactivation of the frontseat passenger airbags ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below. The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ sistance. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ vated. Indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, proper functioning of the front passenger air‐ bag might not be assured.◀ Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ structions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.◀ Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ ther activated or deactivated. ▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint fix‐ ing system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. Detected child seats To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 95 Controls Safety factured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front passenger's airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ er's seat. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature. Hints Tire damage due to external factors With a respective message appearing on Con‐ trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep the accuracy of this function over the longterm. Sudden tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ vance.◀ Calibrating the front seats With use of the system observe further infor‐ mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ fer to page 173. A corresponding message appears on the Control Display. 1. Press the reel and move the respective seat all the way forward. 2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still moves forward slightly. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap‐ pears. If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ peat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a re‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible. Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.◀ Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is not assured. Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" The status is displayed. 96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Safety Status control display Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display. All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. Controls 5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform reset". 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically while driving. The progress of the reset is displayed. After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is displayed. You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically. Low tire pressure message Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ The system is being reset. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. ▷ Malfunction. Status information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐ pending on the model, tire temperatures. It shows the actual values read; they may vary depending on driving style or weather condi‐ tions. Carry out reset Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. On the Control Display and on the vehicle: 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Identify the damaged wheel. Do so by checking the tire inflation pressure using the Mobility System. To correct the tire in‐ flation pressure, refer to page 180. 3. Repair flat tire with the Mobility System, re‐ fer to page 178, or replace the damaged wheel. If a Mobility System is not available, contact the service center. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. ▷ No reset was performed for the system. The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset. "Perform reset" 4. Switch on drive readiness – do not drive off. A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC Dynamic Stability Control. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 97 Controls Safety Required tire inflation pressure check message ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again. A Check Control message is displayed in the following situations ▷ Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. ▷ The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done. ▷ Inflation was not carried out according to specifications. ▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last confirmation. In this case: ▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. ▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire change. System limits The system does not function properly if a re‐ set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct. The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply. Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ tected. Display in the following situations: ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if needed. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center. 98 Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Safety sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The status is displayed. Initialization When initializing the once set inflation tire pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ firming the tire inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Perform reset" 4. Switch on drive readiness – do not drive off. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ tween the individual wheels while driving. In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. This will be detected and reported as a flat tire. The system does not measure the actual infla‐ tion pressure in the tires. Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Controls "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes. Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Identify the damaged wheel. Do so by checking the tire inflation pressure using the Mobility System. If the tire inflation pressure in all tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. 3. Repair flat tire with the Mobility System, re‐ fer to page 178, or replace the damaged wheel. If a Mobility System is not available, contact the service center. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 99 Controls Safety When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on if needed. System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.◀ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Tow-starting and towing ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface. For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). At a glance ▷ When the system has not been initialized. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Button in the vehicle Intelligent Safety The concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system. The intelligent safety systems can hel prevent an imminent collision. ▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐ ing function, refer to page 101. ▷ Pedestrian warning with City Braking func‐ tion, refer to page 104. Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ 100 Intelligent Safety button Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems activate according to the last setting. Press button briefly: ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Safety cording to their respective set‐ tings. Controls 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation. ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐ tive to their individual settings. Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h. Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Detection range Press button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are activated. ▷ The LED lights up green. Hold down button: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off. ▷ The LED goes out. It responds to objects if they are detected by the system. Front-end collision warning with City Braking function Hints The concept The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently if needed. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. A camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system. The front-end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally the collision warning is delayed avoiding false alarm. Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ General information The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 101 Controls Safety Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ At a glance Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac‐ cording to their respective set‐ tings. ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐ tive to their individual settings. Button in the vehicle Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Press button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are activated. ▷ The LED lights up green. Hold down button: Intelligent Safety button ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off. ▷ The LED goes out. Camera Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via iDrive. 1. "Settings" 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" 3. Activate the desired time on the Control Display. The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Switching on/off Switching on automatically The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use. Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster. The system is automatically active after every driving-off. 102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Safety Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. Brake and increase distance. The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ ver. Prewarning This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning. Controls The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric‐ tions are to be considered. System limits Detection range The system's detection potential is limited. Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected: ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. Acute warning with braking function ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ vention in a possible risk of collision. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous prewarning. ▷ In tight curves. Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on. Functional limitations ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. ▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐ ror is dirty or obscured. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive readiness is established. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 103 Controls Safety Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ cess of false warnings. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left. Pedestrian warning with city braking function A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. The concept Hints The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐ destrians. The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function. The camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system. Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ Adapting your speed and driving style General information In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐ sions with pedestrians at speeds from about 6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h shortly before a collision the system supports you with a braking intervention. Under those circumstances it reacts to people who are within the detection range of the sys‐ tem. Detection range The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas. 104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Safety Controls At a glance ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐ tive to their individual settings. Button in the vehicle Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Press button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are activated. ▷ The LED lights up green. Hold down button: Intelligent Safety button ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off. ▷ The LED goes out. Camera Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds. The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Switching on/off Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving-off. Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac‐ cording to their respective set‐ tings. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 105 Controls Safety Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric‐ tions are to be considered. System limits Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ ited. Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected: ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. ▷ If the camera viewing field or the front windshield are dirty or covered. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive readiness is established. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky. ▷ When it is dark outside. 106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving stability control systems Controls Driving stability control systems Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle contains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is ready when car is ready to drive. Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the greatest possible braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ tance to a minimum during emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop. Energy recovery In the event of danger, such as with locked wheels, energy recovery is reduced in order to prevent unstable driving situations. Always be ready to apply the brake Always be ready to apply the brake, be‐ cause without energy recovery there is also no braking action through the electric drive unit. The vehicle could roll further than anticipated. This may constitute a danger for other traffic.◀ DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐ cle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels. Note Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ Do not deactivate DSC when driving with roof load Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roofmounted luggage rack. Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐ ing-critical situation due to the elevated center of gravity.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 107 Controls Driving stability control systems Indicator/warning lights Deactivating DTC The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ trols the drive and braking forces. 1. "Settings" The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has 3. "Normal" failed. 2. "Traction control" TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. DTC Dynamic Traction Control When drive readiness is switched on, DTC is automatically deactivated. The concept Driving Dynamics Control The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized. The concept The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ what limited driving stability. Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. The Driving Dynamics Control helps to finetune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐ ous programs can be selected for this purpose. Overview Button in the vehicle Therefore drive with appropriate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads. ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Operating the programs Driving Dynamics Control COMFORT Activating DTC ECO PRO 1. "Settings" ECO PRO+ 2. "Traction control" 3. "TRACTION" TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up. 108 Program COMFORT For balanced tuning. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving stability control systems Activating COMFORT Press button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. ECO PRO ECO PRO, refer to page 155, provides consis‐ tent tuning to maximize range. Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. The program can be configured to individual specifications. Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster. Controls Displays Program selection Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs. Depending on your vehicle's op‐ tional features, the list in the in‐ strument cluster can differ from the illustration shown. Selected program The ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ driving pro‐ grams are shown in the instrument cluster. In addition, the display on the automatic climate control lights up Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed on the Control Display. Configuring ECO PRO 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" Make the desired settings. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Driving mode info" ECO PRO+ Drive-off assistant ECO PRO+, refer to page 155, also limits the maximum speed and reduces climate control and lighting functions. This system supports driving off on inclines. The parking brake is not required. Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. Activating ECO PRO+ 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐ out delay. Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly. Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll back.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 109 Controls Driving comfort Driving comfort Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Camera-based cruise control with Stop & Go function, ACC The concept Use this system to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads. To the extent possible, the system automati‐ cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. A camera on the interior rear view mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ tomatically reduces the speed, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ cle ahead begins moving faster. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ riod, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. Your own vehicle will brake automatically and then accelerate again. If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐ celerator pedal or press the appropriate button 110 to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐ matically accelerate. As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐ erates to the desired speed. The speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained uphill if engine power is insufficient. General information Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system holds the driver responsible for his or her driving, particularly for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed, keeping your distance and for your driving style all in relation to traffic. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed, e.g. through braking, steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of accident.◀ Unfavorable weather conditions In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of vehicles as well as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already de‐ tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐ rent traffic situation. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against moving on its own. Before leaving the vehicle, set the parking brake and reel off drive readiness. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀ At a glance Buttons on the steering wheel Press but‐ ton Function Controls Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. A dirty or covered area in front of the interior mirror may hinder the detection of vehicles. If necessary, clean the area in front of the inte‐ rior mirror, e.g., carefully remove salt residue in the winter. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control Switching on Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ ing, refer to page 111. Press button on the steering wheel. Store/maintain speed, refer to page 112. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Resume speed, refer to page 113. Adjust distance, refer to page 113. Desired speed becomes current speed and will be displayed - beside the sym‐ bol - in the Info Display. Cruise control can be used. rocker switch: Maintain, store, change speed, refer to page 112. Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifica‐ tions. Camera Switch off Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.◀ To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time. Press button on the steering wheel. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. Interrupting The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Press button on the steering wheel. If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 111 Controls Driving comfort The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: ▷ When the brakes are applied. ▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ gaged. ▷ When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened while the vehicle is standing still. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. ▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐ paired, e.g., by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed This is displayed in the speedometer and con‐ tinuously in the instrument cluster. Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 113. Hints When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed. Adjusting the desired speed Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Differences in speed Changing the speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. Large differences in speed relative to other vehicles cannot be compensated by the system such as in the following situations: If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane. ▷ When stationary objects are approached at high speed.◀ Maintaining/storing the speed Press button. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action. Or: 112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort Distance To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ matically, briefly press the accelerator or press the RES or SET button. Select a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.◀ Adjust distance Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set. The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster. Calling up the desired speed and distance While driving Press button with the system switched on. Desired speed and distance are then contin‐ ued with these settings. The instrument clus‐ ter briefly displays the selected distance. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When drive readiness is switched off. Controls Flashing bar in the distance display indicates that the vehicle in the camera detection range has moved away. Your vehicle was brought down to a halt through stepping on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle: 1. Press button to call up a stored desired speed. 2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away. Changing between cruise control with/ without distance control Traffic ahead The cruise control does not react to traf‐ fic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. Take this factor into account – you yourself must react; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ To reel over to cruise control: Press and hold this button. The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill: The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and check-control message is displayed as soon as the reel is made to cruise control. ▷ In order to reel back to Active Cruise Control, press the button again briefly. While standing Green indicator in the info display: Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the camera's range moves off. Displays in the instrument cluster Desired speed ▷ Indicator in the info display switches to orange: no automatic driving off. The desired speed is displayed next to the symbol in the info display. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 113 Controls Driving comfort ▷ The indicator lights up green: the system is active. ▷ The indicator lights up orange: the system has been interrupted. ▷ No display: system is switched off. Status display Selected desired speed. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for operations. Distance to vehicle ahead of you Selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐ tion of the instrument cluster. A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver. The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected. Distance 1 Distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected. Distance 2 Flashing bar: the detected vehicle has driven away. Distance display ACC is no longer accelerating. To ac‐ celerate further, activate ACC by stepping on the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES button or rocker switch. Distance 3 Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on. Indicator/warning lights Changing between cruise control with/ without distance control Display in the instrument cluster: Cruise Control without distance con‐ trol. Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lights do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Active Cruise Control with distance control. The vehicle symbol lights up orange: 114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort System limits Controls Swerving vehicles Speed range The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The desired speed can be set between 20 mph/30 km/h and 85 mph/140 km/h. The system can also be activated when sta‐ tionary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ uation when using the system. Detection range A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. Swerving vehicles The detection lidacity of the system and the automatic braking lidacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected. Limited detection potential If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐ hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐ wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Cornering Because of the limited possible detec‐ tion, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene if needed; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Deceleration The system does not decelerate for: ▷ Pedestrians, cyclists or similar slow road users. ▷ Red traffic lights. ▷ Cross traffic. ▷ Oncoming traffic. ▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with defective lighting at night. If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves the system offers only restricted detection where a vehicle ahead of you might be detected late or not at all. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 115 Controls Driving comfort Cruise control The concept The system maintains a preset speed via the buttons on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking is insufficient. When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐ ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ ating. After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐ activated and controls speed independently. Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example: ▷ On steep inclines. ▷ From behind bumps in the road. In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal. Malfunction General information Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Hints Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ stant speed, e.g.: ▷ On winding roads. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ cle and cause an accident.◀ A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails. Overview The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Buttons on the steering wheel ▷ When an object was not correctly de‐ tected. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the camera viewing field or the front windshield are dirty or covered. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ Up to 20 seconds after drive readiness is switched on via the Start/Stop knob. Press button Function System on/off, interrupt Store speed Resume speed rocker switch: change, hold, store speed ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. 116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort Controls Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed Controls Switching on Press button on the steering wheel. Hints Adjusting the desired speed The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Desired speed becomes current speed and will be displayed - beside the sym‐ bol - in the Info Display. Maintaining/storing the speed Cruise control can be used. Press button. Or: Switch off Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.◀ Press button. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. Interrupting When active, press the button. The system is automatically interrupted if: ▷ The brakes are applied. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. This is displayed in the instrument cluster. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed. ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged. Changing the speed ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is acti‐ vated. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 117 Controls Driving comfort ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set de‐ pends on the vehicle. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. Resuming the desired speed If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for operations. PDC Park Distance Control The concept PDC is a support when parking. When you slowly approach an object in the rear - or also in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ ble - then the object is reported through: ▷ Signal tones. ▷ Visual display. General information Press button. The stored speed is reached and maintained. Displays in the instrument cluster Indicator lamp Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure the distances from objects. The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐ stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ tem is switched on. ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. To ensure full functionality: Desired speed The desired speed is displayed next to the symbol in the info display. ▷ The indicator lights up green: the system is active. ▷ The indicator lights up orange: the system has been interrupted. ▷ No display: system is switched off. ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, bicycle racks. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Hints Personal responsibility Status display Selected desired speed. Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. 118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed - risk of accident.◀ Avoid driving fast with PDC Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐ tive. For technical reasons, the system may other‐ wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ Overview Controls Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if needed. With front PDC: switching on/off manually Press button. With front PDC: button in vehicle ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The rearview camera image is displayed when the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the button. Display Signal tones PDC Park Distance Control Switching on/off Switching on automatically PDC switches on automatically in the following situations: ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged while drive readiness is switched on. The rearview camera also switches on. ▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obsta‐ cles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E. g. if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. With front PDC: if objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged. You may turn off automatic activation: Volume 1. "Settings" The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐ justed similar to the sound and volume set‐ tings of the radio. 2. "Parking" 3. Select setting. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 119 Controls Driving comfort Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ In heavy rain. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors green, yellow and red. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, the reel can be made to PDC: ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. "Rear view camera" ▷ On rough road surfaces. ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. System limits Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: ▷ In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ rages. ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ Through heavy pollution. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Con‐ trol Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. To ensure full functionality: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐ sors. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. 120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort Controls Rearview camera Clean the camera lens, refer to page 203. The concept Switching on/off The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ Switching on automatically With drive readiness switched on, engage lever in position P R. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if needed. Switching on/off manually At a glance Press button. Button in the vehicle ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. The rearview camera image is displayed when the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the button. Switching the view via iDrive With PDC activated: Rearview camera "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed. Camera Display on the Control Display Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The tailgate is fully closed. Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac‐ tive at the same time. The camera lens is located underneath the tail‐ gate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. ▷ Parking aid lines "Parking aid lines" Lanes and turning radius are indicated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 121 Controls Driving comfort Obstacle marking ▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. Pathway lines Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC sensors and, when respectively equipped, detected by the rearview camera. ▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera. ▷ They help you to estimate how much space is needed when parking and maneu‐ vering on level pavement. ▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐ ing angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Turning circle lines Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. Their colored margins match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐ tance to the object shown. Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ dius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space. ▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐ posed on the rearview camera image to‐ gether with pathway lines. ▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐ sible turning radius on a level road. ▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐ ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐ tain angle. 122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line. Controls Parking assistant The concept Display settings This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ lel to the road. Brightness Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. System limits Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC. Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to page 118. The objects displayed on the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ sible parking line and during the parking proce‐ dure takes control of steering, the acceleration and braking and if needed changes the gears. Hold down the parking assistant button for the duration of the parking procedure. At the end of the parking procedure, the P selector lever position is set. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐ view camera and react accordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 118. Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed - risk of accident.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 123 Controls Driving comfort Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system. Overview Button in the vehicle Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀ Transporting cargo Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀ Parking assistant Ultrasound sensors Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curb if need be. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ cle may become damaged.◀ Requirements For measuring parking spaces ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Suitable parking space ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Regarding the parking procedure ▷ Doors and tailgate closed. ▷ Parking brake released. ▷ Driver's safety belt fastened. 124 The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. To ensure full functionality: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. ▷ Do not put stickers over sensors. Switching on/off Switching on with the button Press button. The LED lights up. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort Parking assistant is activated automatically. Switching on with selector lever position R Controls is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ lighted. ▷ Engage selector lever position R. The parking procedure is ac‐ tive. Steering control has been taken over by system. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. To activate: "Parking Assistant" Switch off The system can be deactivated as follows: ▷ Press button. Display on the Control Display System activated/deactivated Symbol Meaning Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated. The system is activated. ▷ Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray. Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐ hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and PDC's signals. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐ ger of an accident.◀ 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ vate it if needed. The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. System status 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display. 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if needed. Interrupting manually ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant is activated and search for parking space active. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: ▷ ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display. Press button. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 125 Controls Driving comfort Interrupting automatically Functional limitations The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. ▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces. ▷ On slippery ground. ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly arise. Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays clearances that are too small. Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded. ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ When switching to another function on the Control Display. ▷ When the button is released. ▷ If the tailgate is open. ▷ If doors are open. ▷ When setting the parking brake. ▷ During acceleration. ▷ When braking. ▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. Resume An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ tinued if needed. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this. System limits ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ tance in the following situations: ▷ In tight curves. 126 Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving comfort Controls Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 127 Controls Climate control Climate control Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Air conditioner 1 Seat heating, left 54 7 Remove ice and condensation 2 Cooling function 8 Rear window defroster 3 Temperature 9 Recirculated-air mode 4 Air distribution, windows 10 Seat heating, right 54 5 Air distribution, upper body region 11 Air flow 6 Air distribution, footwell 128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Climate control Hints ▷ Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Climate control functions in detail Controls Footwell. You may combine these programs as needed. Defrosts windows and removes condensation Press button. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ moved from the windshield and the front side windows. Adjust air flow with the program active. Cooling function Cooling of the interior with the A/C button is only possible with drive readiness switched on. Press button. The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ ting, warmed again. Depending on the weather, the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when drive readiness is activated. The air conditioner produces condensation water, refer to page 151, that will exit from be‐ low the car. Temperature Turn the ring to set the desired temperature. The air conditioner regulates this temperature and then holds it constant. To reduce the energy consumption, the cool‐ ing or heating output is reduced or deactivated as per ECO-PRO mode, refer to page 155. Manual air distribution Press buttons repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Windows. ▷ Upper body region. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function to dehumidify the air. Rear window defroster Press button. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. Recirculated-air mode You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode: ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ nently blocked. Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window fogging. To prevent window fogging, recirculated air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the environ‐ mental conditions. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 129 Controls Climate control If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed. Switching the system on/off Switch off Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Press and hold the left button until the control switches off. Switching on Press any button except ▷ Rear window defroster. ▷ Seat heating. Air flow, manual Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. The intensity is indicated through LEDs. The highest level is active when five LEDs are lit. The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ duced automatically to save battery power. Microfilter In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 188, of your vehi‐ cle. Automatic climate control 1 Seat heating, left 54 3 Display 2 Cooling function 4 Temperature 130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Climate control Controls 5 Vent settings 6 AUTO program 10 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ lated-air mode 7 Maximum cooling 11 Seat heating, right 54 8 Remove ice and condensation 12 Activated driving mode display 155 9 Rear window defroster 13 Air flow, AUTO intensity Hints Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Climate control functions in detail Cooling function The car's interior can be cooled with the sta‐ tionary climate control or via the A/C button with drive readiness activated. Press button. The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ ting, warmed again. The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐ play of the automatic climate control. The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if needed by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant. Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature. To reduce the energy consumption, the cool‐ ing or heating output is reduced or deactivated as per ECO-PRO mode, refer to page 155. Manual air distribution Press button repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Windows. ▷ Upper body region. Depending on the weather, the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when drive readiness is activated. ▷ Footwell. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. ▷ Upper body region and footwell. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 151, devel‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle. Temperature Turn the ring to set the desired temperature. ▷ Windows and upper body region. ▷ Windows and footwell. ▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell. The selected air distribution is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor. AUTO program Press button. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 131 Controls Climate control Air flow, air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically. Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 131, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible. To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution. Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ matic intensity control can be changed. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ sity. The intensity level is indicated through LEDs. Maximum cooling The system is set to the lowest tem‐ perature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ gion. The vents need to be open for this. The function is available above an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and when drive readiness is indicated. If ECO PRO+, refer to page 155, is activated, this function is deactivated. Adjust air flow with the program active. Defrosts windows and removes condensation 132 For this purpose, point the side vents onto the side windows as needed. Adjust air flow with the program active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor. Rear window defroster Press button. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode: Press button. Press button. Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win‐ dows. ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automatically. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ manently blocked. Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window fogging. To prevent window fogging, recirculated air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the environ‐ mental conditions. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Climate control If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. Controls Ventilation Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Air flow, manual To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐ gram first. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. The intensity is indicated through LEDs. The highest level is active when five LEDs are lit. ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 1. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2. Adjusting the ventilation ▷ Ventilation for cooling: Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's interior is too hot. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power. ▷ Draft-free ventilation: Switching the system on/off Stationary climate control Switch off The concept Press and hold the left button until the control switches off. Switching on Press any button except ▷ Rear window defroster. ▷ Seat heating. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 188, of your vehi‐ cle. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. Stationary climate control cools or heats the interior prior to departure to a comfortable temperature. The interior temperature is lowered with high cooling output. The system may heat the interior. Snow and ice can be removed more easily. The air automatically exits through the vents to the windshield, the side windows, the upper body region and into the footwell. The stationary climate control can be switched on and off via the following systems: ▷ Direct operation, refer to page 134. ▷ Preselected departure times, refer to page 134. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 133 Controls Climate control With the BMW i Remote App, refer to page 134, the standing air conditioning can be switched on. 4. "Precondition for departure time" The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol lights up when the departure time is acti‐ vated. If stationary climate control is used during the charging process, less air conditioning ca‐ pacity will be required while driving. This opti‐ mizes the range. Functional requirements ▷ When the departure time is preselected: depends on internal, external and set tem‐ perature. ▷ Direct operation via iDrive: any external temperature. ▷ Charging cable connected or high-voltage battery sufficiently charged. ▷ Drive readiness is deactivated. ▷ The vents are open to allow air to flow out. 5. Set and activate Desired departure time, refer to page 167. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the stationary climate control has been switched on. If drive readiness is switched off, changes can be made on the Control Display. Departure time can only be changed once. Scheduled de‐ parture times are not adjusted. Settings for cli‐ mate control and charging operation are also applied for scheduled departure times. Activating with BMW i Remote App Using the BMW i Remote App, the system can be directly switched on or via a preset depar‐ ture time. Switching on/off directly On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comfort climate control" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes if the stationary climate control is switched on. Activate climate control at departure time The reel-on time is automatically determined based on the temperature. The system promptly switches on before the selected de‐ parture time. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Departure time" 3. "Departure 1:" 134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Interior equipment Controls Interior equipment Vehicle features and options Compatibility This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is gener‐ ally compatible with the universal garage door opener. Universal Integrated Remote Control If you have any questions, please contact: ▷ Your service center. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. Control elements on the interior rearview mirror The concept The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐ tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener re‐ places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ med with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. During programming During programming and before activat‐ ing a device using the universal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐ mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐ trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. ▷ LED, arrow 1. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming. Programming General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup: Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 135 Controls Interior equipment erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ pends on the manual transmitter. 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program‐ med on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ gin flashing slowly. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ rior rearview mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ tween the interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distan‐ ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. 6. To program other functions on other but‐ tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ rior rearview mirror buttons. Special feature of the alternatingcode wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat‐ ing-code system. rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ peat for approximately 20 seconds. For systems with an alternating-code system, the universal garage door opener and the sys‐ tem also have to be synchronized. Please read the operating manual to find out how to synchronize the system. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ ond person. To synchronize: 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ mote-controlled system. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. 4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐ zation is complete, the programmed func‐ tion will be carried out. Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐ view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior 136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Interior equipment 4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans‐ mitter. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the in‐ terior rearview mirror. Controls proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually. Digital compass Overview If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Controls Before operation Before operating a system using the uni‐ versal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear‐ view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted. Deleting stored functions Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐ 1 Control button 2 Mirror display Mirror display The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight. Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the con‐ trol button is pressed: ▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting. ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ fer to World map with compass zones. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 137 Controls Interior equipment World map with magnetic zones Procedure Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror. 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle. 2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ trol button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corre‐ sponds with your location appears in the mirror. The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ pass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds. Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: ▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. ▷ The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel. ▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ played. 138 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass. Left/right-hand steering The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory. Setting the language Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to reel between English "E" and German "O". Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Interior equipment Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ mately 10 seconds. Sun visor Controls Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Overview Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up. Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on. Ashtray/cigarette lighter Ashtray The cigarette lighter is located between the front seats. Push in the lighter. Overview The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out. Connecting electrical devices Hints The ashtray can be inserted in the cupholder. Emptying Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.◀ Take out the insert. Lighter Danger of burns Replace the cover after use Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of getting burned. Switch off operating readiness and take the re‐ mote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀ Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 139 Controls Interior equipment Sockets In the trunk General information The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when operating and drive readiness are activated. Note The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors. The socket is located on the right side in the trunk. Remove the cover. Front center console USB interface for data transfer The concept Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 39. ▷ Music collection. The socket is located underneath the instru‐ ment panel. Remove the cover. ▷ Importing Trips. Between the front seats Observe the following when connecting: Hints ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐ ing external devices. The socket is located between the front seats. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. 140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Interior equipment At a glance Controls Installing 1. Place the cover in the brackets. 2. Attach the retaining straps. Enlarging the trunk General information The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The socket is located between the front seats. Hints Danger of jamming Cargo area Cargo cover General information The cargo cover is raised when the tailgate is opened. Note Do not deposit heavy objects Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may pose a risk to occupants, such as during braking and evasive maneuvers.◀ Removing Before folding down the rear seat back‐ rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. Ensure that no one is lo‐ cated in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injury or damage may result.◀ Ensuring the stability of the child seat When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ rest.◀ 1. Detach the retaining straps at the tailgate. Ensure that the lock is securely engaged 2. Raise the cover and pull it back to remove. When you fold back the backrest make sure that it locks in place. The red mark on the front loop must disappear. Otherwise trans‐ ported cargo could shoot into the car's interior during braking or evasive maneuvers and en‐ danger occupants.◀ Fold in headrests, before rear seat back‐ rests are folded down Before folding down the rear seat backrests, make sure that the corresponding headrest is pushed all the way down and folded away; oth‐ erwise, damage may result.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 141 Controls Interior equipment Folding down rear seat backrest Only use loops for releasing the rear seat backrests Do not use the loops for releasing the rear seat backrests to attach objects; otherwise there is an increased risk of injury because of unex‐ pected movement of the rear seat backrest.◀ The rear seat backrest can be folded down from the front or from the cargo area. Or: pull the corresponding loop in the cargo area and fold the seat backrest forward. To secure cargo, refer to page 153, with nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing eyes. Loading position of the rear seat backrest Before folding down the backrest, make sure that the belt is located in the belt buckle. The rear seat backrests can be individually set in two different positions. To expand the cargo area, the rear seat back‐ rest can be moved into a vertical position. 1. Pull corresponding loop. 2. Set the loading position of the seat back‐ rest. 3. Latch the rear seat backrest. The red mark on the front loop must disappear. Rear seat backrest basic position Pull the corresponding loop on the seat back‐ rest forward. When folding back the backrests from the folded down position, first latch them in the loading position. 1. Pull corresponding loop. 2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. 3. Pull loop again. 4. Fold rear seat backrest all the way back. 5. Latch the rear seat backrest. The red mark on the front loop must disappear. 142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Storage compartments Controls Storage compartments Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Glove compartment Front passenger side Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Opening Hints No loose objects in the car's interior Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐ rior without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants e.g., during braking and evasive maneuvers.◀ Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ board Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀ Press button and open cover upward. Closing Fold cover closed. Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: Between the front seats ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 143. Center armrest ▷ Between the front seats, refer to page 143. ▷ Compartments in the front doors, refer to page 145. Open/tilt A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats. ▷ Rear seat, refer to page 145. ▷ Storage compartments in the trunk, refer to page 145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 143 Controls Storage compartments Receptacle for cupholder To open, press button, arrow 1. To open, press button, arrow 2. There is a receptacle for the cup holder be‐ tween the seats. Front cup holder Hints Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.◀ Overview Between the seats. 144 There are three receptacles for the cup holder between the seats. Connection for an external audio device An external audio device, e.g., an MP3 player, can be con‐ nected via the AUX-IN port or the USB audio interface be‐ tween the seats. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Storage compartments Storage compartment Overview There is a storage compartment between the seats. Between the seats. Compartments in the doors Do not stow any breakable objects Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐ cident.◀ Controls Clothes hooks Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's view.◀ No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ neuvers.◀ Rear seat Rear cup holder Two folding clothes hooks are provided in the rear of the vehicle. To unfold them, press on the top edge of the clothes hooks. Hints Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.◀ Storage compartments in the trunk Retaining strap A retaining strap is available on the right and left side trim for fastening small objects. Lashing eyes in the trunk To secure the cargo, refer to page 153, there are four lashing eyes in the trunk. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Driving tips Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐ formance between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐ riod. Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob‐ served if any of the components above-men‐ tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. Breaking-in period General information Using eDRIVE efficiently Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ other (break-in time). The concept The following instructions will help accomplish a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Range Extender The full performance of the Range Extender is available after a brief operating period and is only minimally restricted during the run-in phase. Control of the Range Extender during and after the run-in phase, as well as the activation of the full performance, are preset depending on the system and take place automatically. eDRIVE operates automatically. Proactive driv‐ ing utilizes energy consumption and energy re‐ covery optimally. Energy recovery is used to charge the high-voltage battery. It is important for the supply of electrical components and thus a prerequisite for an extensive range. En‐ ergy consumption and recovery depend very much, among other things, on your driving style. Optimizing driving style Performance display The driving style can be optimized using the performance display. Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. 148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Things to remember when driving Driving tips charging location. If necessary, the high-volt‐ age battery will be charged automatically. Make sure that the charging process takes place. Regularly check the charging state. Don't allow battery charge status to drop too low - it will damage the battery.◀ The energy recovery occurs during coasting and braking and is displayed in the perform‐ ance display by the accelerator pedal indicator. The accelerator pedal pointer is within the CHARGE range. Efficient energy recovery: ▷ The accelerator pedal moves to the left within the blue range of the CHARGE dis‐ play, arrow 1. ▷ The energy use while driving can be opti‐ mized by efficient acceleration. Efficient acceleration: ▷ The accelerator pedal moves to the right within the blue range of the ePOWER dis‐ play, arrow 2. ▷ Use deceleration during coasting as often as possible for energy recovery. Brake according to traffic and circum‐ stances Brake in accordance with the traffic conditions, or there is the risk of accident.◀ Discharge of the high-voltage battery Longer idle periods, refer to page 203, can re‐ duce the charging state of the high-voltage battery. Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for ex‐ tended periods with a low charging state Before storing the vehicle for an extended pe‐ riod, check the battery charge indicator to en‐ sure that the high-voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle to a charging station at a suitable General driving notes Closing the tailgate Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ wise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐ fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. Moreover, exhaust gases can get into the vehicle interior and the lights in the tailgate cannot be recognized.◀ If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. ▷ Drive moderately. Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐ sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐ erty damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is a danger of getting burned.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 149 Driving tips Things to remember when driving Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ hicle It is not recommended to use mobile phones, such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior without a direct connection to an external aer‐ ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐ ance that the radiation generated during trans‐ mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐ cle interior.◀ Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ fort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode. In certain braking situations, the perforated brake discs can cause functional problems. However, this has no effect on the perform‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake. Objects in the range of movement of the pedals and in the footwell Do not allow objects in the interior around pedals and foot space Hydroplaning Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other ob‐ jects out of the pedal area and do not stow them in the footwell; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving. On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor. Driving through water Observe water level and speed Do not exceed the maximum water level and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐ mission may be damaged.◀ Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed. 150 Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀ Hills Avoid stressing the brakes Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀ Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with drive readi‐ ness switched off, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are unavailable with the engine stopped.◀ On downhill sections, use energy recovery if possible to decelerate the vehicle. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Things to remember when driving Driving tips Brake disc corrosion Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the brake pads are favored by: ▷ Low mileage. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during braking is not reached - thus discs don't get cleaned. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐ sponse - generally that cannot be corrected. Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops collecting under‐ neath the vehicle. These traces of water under the vehicle are normal. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 151 Driving tips Loading Loading Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Hints Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐ pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ Only use loops for releasing the rear seat backrests Do not use the loops for releasing the rear seat backrests to attach objects; otherwise there is an increased risk of injury because of unex‐ pected movement of the rear seat backrest.◀ Determining the load limit 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result. No fluids in the cargo area Make sure that fluids do not leak into the cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ aged.◀ Heavy and hard objects Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐ erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀ Load cargo area only with the cargo area floor installed Load the cargo area only if the cargo area floor is located in the cargo area. Otherwise, the cover of the engine below it could be dam‐ aged.◀ 152 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Loading is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs. 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Driving tips Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the trunk Load To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. Securing cargo Securing cargo The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. Stowing cargo ▷ Do not exceed permissible rear axle load. ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. Stow and secure the cargo as described; otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀ ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps. Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo. ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 153 Driving tips Increase range Increase range General information The vehicle contains comprehensive technolo‐ gies for reducing the energy consumption and for maximizing the range. The range depends on a number of different factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ ing style and regular maintenance can increase range and thereby also reduce the environ‐ mental impact. Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight reduces the range. Remove attached parts following use Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the energy consump‐ tion. Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby reduces the range. Tires Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises energy consumption and tire wear. Standing air conditioning Run advance climate control, refer to page 133, in the vehicle during charging if pos‐ sible before driving off. Heating and cooling operations are very en‐ ergy intensive and substantially reduce the electric range. Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and proactively reduces en‐ ergy consumption. Longer braking procedures result in more effi‐ cient charging of the high-voltage battery via energy recovery from braking. Use accelerator pedal for deceleration and coasting General information Tires can affect energy consumption in various ways, for instance energy consumption can be influenced by tire size. 154 Check the tire inflation pressure regularly When approaching a red light, use accelerator pedal for decelerating. For going downhill use coasting function; for this purpose, press accelerator pedal just enough that the vehicle rolls. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Increase range Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Reel off these functions if they are not needed. The ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ driving pro‐ grams support the energy-conserving use of comfort features. They automatically perform a partial or complete deactivation of these func‐ tions. Have maintenance carried out Driving tips ECO PRO ▷ Reduce heat output or heating cycle for ex‐ terior mirror, rear window and seat heating. ▷ What reduces the the cooling and heating output of the climate control system. ▷ The speed is limited to an adjustable maxi‐ mum value between 50 mph/80 km/h and 80 mph/130 km/h. To intentionally exceed the speed limit, press the accelerator pedal all the way down. ECO PRO+ The cooling and heating output of the climate control system are additionally deactivated on ECO PRO+ activation. The low beams are dimmed. Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life. The maintenance should be carried out by your service center. The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph/90 km/h. In special situations, the speed limit can be consciously exceeded by applying the accelerator pedal. Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer to page 188. Activate ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO or ECO PRO+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. The concept ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ support an efficient driving style. To this end, the control of the drive is optimized for moderate acceleration, and adapted to lighting and comfort features, such as climate control output. Some vehicle functions cannot be used during activated drive mode ECO PRO and ECO PRO+. In addition, context-sensitive instructions can be displayed that assist in driving efficiently. Configuring ECO PRO Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" 3. Configure the program. Via the iDrive 1. "Settings" 2. "ECO PRO mode" At a glance With ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ different set‐ tings are made in the respective mode. Or 1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Configure the program. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 155 Driving tips Increase range ECO PRO Tip Mark in the ePOWER area, arrow 2: display when accelerating. ▷ "Limit at:": Adjust the ECO PRO speed. ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": The output is reduced once the set ECO PRO speed is reached. Coasting Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the bar's color: ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range. ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g., by reduced acceleration. With little pressure on the accelerator pedal, the vehicle can coast without energy recovery. The accelerator pedal indicator in the instru‐ ment display is centered between CHARGE and ePOWER during coasting. The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving are met. ECO PRO climate control Driving tip "ECO PRO climate control" As soon as one of the conditions for efficient driving is no longer fulfilled, respective driving instructions are displayed as a symbol in the instrument cluster. Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption can be economized. ECO PRO potential Shows potential savings with the current set‐ tings in percentages. ECO PRO Tip Symbols An additional symbol and a text message are displayed on the control display. Symbol Measure For efficient driving back off the ac‐ celerator or delay accelerating to al‐ low time to assess road conditions. Display in the instrument cluster Efficiency display Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed. Note The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips: A mark in the performance display informs about the current driving style. Mark in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: indication for energy recovery and braking. 156 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "ECO PRO Info" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Increase range Driving tips Indications on the Control Display 3. eDRIVE Display on the Control Display Select the symbol. Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ ogy can be displayed while driving. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "eDRIVE" Displaying ECO PRO Tips ECO PRO Tips can be displayed while driving as a note in the split screen in the energy flow display. Displaying ECO PRO Tips: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "eDRIVE" 3. "ECO PRO Tips" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. ECO PRO driving style analysis The concept The system helps develop a particularly effi‐ cient driving style and to save energy. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. Those assessments will help you adjust your driving style and save some energy. The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐ ysis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ ing style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐ row 1. The table of values contains stars. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are displayed in the table, arrow 2. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving. Tips about the energy saving driving style, In‐ crease range, refer to page 154. The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. The range of the vehicle can be extended by an efficient driving style. Functional requirement The function is only available in ECO PRO mode. Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "eDRIVE" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Mobility In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Mobility Charging vehicle Charging vehicle Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. The concept The vehicle can be charged using various charging cables at charging stations or hous‐ hold sockets. Control and monitoring of the charging process are handled completely au‐ tomatically. The charge current strength can be set by means of the Control Display. General information High-voltage battery The high-voltage battery is used as an energy accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be charged by energy recovery during the trip or via the power grid. Charge current The charge current strength is indicated in am‐ peres. The vehicle cannot automatically detect the maximum permissible charge current strength of the power grid during charging via a house‐ hold socket or charging station. Level 1 charging Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own household socket, as well as when charging at external electrical power sockets in Level 1, the allowed charge current strength must be determined, e.g. by a qualified electrician. The charge current strength for Level 1 charg‐ ing, refer to page 165, can be adjusted in the vehicle in three steps. At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charging is set to "Low". Depending on the country-specific version, one of four ampere ratings is printed on the Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is the limit which must be adhered to for the vehi‐ cle if the charge current is set to "Maximum". According to the market-specific version, the charge current strength changes differently if the setting "Reduced" or "Low" is selected. "Maximum" "Reduced" "Low" When charging via the power grid, you can chose between the following variants. 8A 6A 6A ▷ Level 1 charging via a household socket. 10 A 7.5 A 6A ▷ Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta‐ tion. 12 A 9A 6A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A ▷ Charging via a DC charging station. Level 1 charging is possible via a household socket within a voltage range of 100 volts to 240 volts. For optimal use of the energy from the power grid, charging at a Level 2 charging station, such as BMW i Wallbox, is recommended. 160 Charging at a Level 2 charging station The permitted charge current strength must be determined prior to charging at a Level 2 charging station, e.g. from the operator Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Charging vehicle of the Level 2 charging station. The permitted charge current strength can vary by country. The charge current strength for Level 2 charg‐ ing, refer to page 166, can be adjusted in the vehicle in two steps. At delivery, the charge current for Level 2 charging is set to "Reduced". This set‐ ting should be maintained, unless it was veri‐ fied that a higher charge current strength is permitted in the individual case. The charge current changes depending on the setting. "Maximum" "Reduced" 32 A 20 A Depending on the charge current, the charging duration changes. Range Extender With Range Extender, refer to page 69, switched on, the current charging state can be maintained. In this way, a higher range is ach‐ ieved. Hints Mobility Follow instructions at the charging sta‐ tion When working with electrical current, follow the instructions at the charging station. Other‐ wise, there is a risk of an accident.◀ Make sure that the charging device is in flawless operating condition Only use the charging device in a flawless con‐ dition. Otherwise, a risk of fire may result, e.g., from the device heating up because of, say, worn contacts or damage.◀ No simultaneous charging and refueling Do not refuel while a charging cable is plugged in, and maintain an adequate safety distance from highly flammable materials. Oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage from burning fuel vapors, e.g., if the charging cable is improperly plug‐ ged in or unplugged.◀ Have the charging port cleaned by trained personnel If the charging port is dirty, have the car cleaned only by appropriately trained person‐ nel. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury from high voltage.◀ Working with electrical current When working with electrical current, ob‐ serve the safety regulations. Otherwise, with high voltage or excess current there is a risk to persons and property, e.g., from electrocution or fire.◀ Have the charging device checked be‐ fore commissioning Before the initial charging process, have your own charging device checked at the charging location by a qualified electrician, that is, charging port on the vehicle, charging cable, charging station or household socket and con‐ nected circuits. Otherwise, there is a danger of damage to the vehicle and overloading of the supply mains at the charging location.◀ Charging cable General information Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging cable or the permanently installed charging ca‐ ble of a charging station to charge the vehicle. Different charging cables can be required de‐ pending on the country. Hints Use approved charging cables only Use only approved charging cables or charging stations for charging. Otherwise, there is a danger of property damage or per‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 161 Mobility Charging vehicle sonal injury, e.g., from burning cables. Informa‐ tion about the approved charging cables can be obtained from the service center.◀ Use the charging cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not extend it Use the charging cable only for charging the vehicle and do not extend it with cables or adapters. Otherwise, it may not be possible to complete the charging process or property damage might occur, e.g., due to a cable fire.◀ Do not use any damaged charging cables Do not use any damaged charging ca‐ bles. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury from high voltage.◀ Level 1 charging cable With the Level 1 charging cable, it is permissi‐ ble to perform charging from grounded house‐ hold sockets. At the power connection of a household socket, charging is done with alter‐ nating current. ble to charge at DC charging stations. Charg‐ ing is performed with direct current at designated DC charging stations. At the higher lidacity current connection of a DC charger station the charging time is significantly lower than with a household socket or a level 2 charging station. During charging at a DC charging station, an indication in the instrument cluster, refer to page 166, is displayed. Storage The Level 1 charging cable is located in the ca‐ ble compartment under the hood. The Level 2 charging cable can be stored in the same place. Moisture can penetrate into the occasional use cable compartment, e.g. in a car wash. If required, store the charging cable with the installed plug cover to prevent moisture in the charging cable plug. When a Level 1 charging cable is used, this may produce efficiency values other than indi‐ cated on the energy label. Level 2 charging cable The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to recharge at sockets of designated Level 2 charging stations using a special plug. Charging is performed with alternating current at designated Level 2 charging stations. The charging process can be completed faster than at household sockets. If necessary, the charging cable is attached to the charging station. If a Level 2 charging cable is used, apply the corresponding setting on the Control Display, refer to page 166. DC charging cable The DC charging cable that is permanently in‐ stalled at the charging station makes is possi‐ 162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Charging vehicle Connection Mobility Charging cable is unlocked. To connect, engage selector lever in position P and unlock the vehicle. Set the parking brake if needed. 2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐ row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas. 1. Tap on the charging port flap, arrow. Charging process is interrupted. 2. Remove the charging port lid, arrow. 3. Remove the charging cable from the charging port, arrow 2. 4. Put the charging port lid back on. 5. Close the charging port flap. 6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug if needed. 7. Disconnect either the Level 1 or Level 2 charging cable from the household socket or the port on the charging station as needed. 3. Connect either a Level 1 or Level 2 charg‐ ing cable to the household socket or the port on the charging station. 4. Remove cover of the charging cable plug if needed. 5. Insert the charging cable plug correspond‐ ing to the charging port, and push it in until it latches. When charging at a charging station, follow the instructions at the charging station. Remove 8. Stow the charging cable. At a charging station, insert the perma‐ nently installed charging cable in the place provided for it. Manual release The charging port flap is automatically locked while driving. The charging cable may be locked during the charging process if the vehicle is locked. When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable. 1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is locked. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 163 Mobility Charging vehicle Manually unlocking charging port flap In case of an electrical malfunction of the charging cable lock, the charging port flap can be manually unlocked. 4. Grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas. 5. Remove charging cable. 1. Open rear door on the side of the charging port flap. Charging operation 2. Remove the cover. Hints 3. Pull the blue knob, arrow. This releases the charging port flap. Following safety instructions of the power mains connection During the charging process, heed the safety instructions of the respective power mains connection. Otherwise, there could be a risk of personal injury or property damage from high voltage, e.g., from electrocution or fire.◀ Using a Level 1 charging cable at other household sockets 4. If necessary, press the knob back into the initial position. Manual unlocking of the charging cable In case of an electrical malfunction, the charg‐ ing cable can be manually unlocked. When charging at a charging station, complete the charging process at the charging station before unlocking the charging cable. 1. Open rear door on the side of the charging port flap. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Pull the blue knob, arrow. Charging ca‐ ble is manually unlocked. Before charging at other household sockets, adapt the charging current strength to the mains. Otherwise, there is a risk of fire, e.g., from overheating of the household socket or overloading of the power mains.◀ Starting charging process 1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the parking brake if needed. 2. Planning charging process, refer to page 165. 3. Switch off drive readiness. 4. Connect either a Level 1 or Level 2 charg‐ ing cable to the household socket or the port on the charging station. 5. Open charging port flap. 6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle, re‐ fer to page 163. At high temperatures, initially the high-voltage battery is cooled. The charging process can be started with a delay. Display of the charging status The charging status is indicated by the indica‐ tor light at the charging port. 164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Charging vehicle Mobility The following settings are available: ▷ Immediate charging. ▷ Set time window for favorable charging. ▷ Set charging via a Level 1 charging cable. ▷ Set charging via a Level 2 charging cable. ▷ Lamp white: charging cable can be con‐ nected or removed. ▷ Lamp flashes yellow: charging process is being initialized ▷ Lamp blue: charging process is started at a set time. ▷ Lamp flashes blue: charging process ac‐ tive. ▷ Lamp flashes red: fault in the charging process. If drive readiness is switched off, changes can be made on the Control Display. Departure time can only be changed once. Scheduled de‐ parture times are not adjusted. Settings for standing air conditioning and loading process are accepted for planned departure times too. Immediate charging The charging process starts as soon as the charging cable is connected. 1. "Settings" 2. "Charging" 3. "Charge immediately" ▷ Lamp green: charging process completed. When the vehicle is locked, the indicator lamp goes out after some time. Setting time window for favorable charging When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indica‐ tor lamp flashes continuously. The other indi‐ cator lights go out after some time. Level 1 or Level 2 charging: To check the charging process, press the key on the remote control. The charging status is indicated on the indicator lamp. In some cases the vehicle is locked. Additional messages regarding the charging status, e.g., probable end of charging or the planned departure time, can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on the Control Display and via the BMW i Remote App on the smart‐ phone. Planning charging process The charging process can be adapted to con‐ straints, e.g., the cost of electricity. The vehicle can control the charging process in such a way that the charging process is completed at the departure time. A departure time must be set for this purpose, refer to page 167. When departure time is set, a time window for charging with a favorable electricity rate can be set. 1. "Settings" 2. "Charging" 3. "Low cost charging" 4. Set rate begin. Turn the controller until the desired time is set and press the controller. 5. Set rate end. Turn the controller until the desired time is set and press the controller. Setting charging via a Level 1 charging cable Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle must be charged with a different charging cur‐ rent strength, refer to page 160. 1. "Settings" 2. "Charging" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 165 Mobility Charging vehicle 3. "AC charging power:" Terminating charging process Settings are stored. When you change charg‐ ing locations you also might need to change the setting for charging. 1. Removing the charging cable from the ve‐ hicle, refer to page 163. Set the charge current strength at other household sockets to "Low". Setting charging via a Level 2 charging cable Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle must be charged with a different charging cur‐ rent strength, refer to page 160. When charging with a Level 2 charging cable, the charging process can be completed faster at a Level 2 charging station. 1. "Settings" 2. "Charging" 2. Stow the charging cable as required. 3. Close the charging port flap. 4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. Displays in the instrument cluster The charging state indicator light, refer to page 77, shows the charging state of the highvoltage battery in the instrument cluster, if op‐ erating readiness is switched on. If all seg‐ ments are filled, the high-voltage battery is fully charged. 3. "Level 2:" Even if no segments are filled, the high-voltage system is still under high voltage. Settings are stored. When you change charg‐ ing locations you also might need to change the setting for charging. Information regarding the charging process are shown on the charging screen, refer to page 76. Stopping charging process The charging operation can be stopped at any time by removing the charging cable and con‐ tinued at a later time by connecting the charg‐ ing cable in order to use other loads on the power connection or to prevent simultaneous high power from multiple loads. The charging operation is interrupted when the vehicle is unlocked and automatically resumed after a brief time or when it is locked. Continue charging operation If the charging operation is interrupted, e.g., through a temporary power failure, the charg‐ ing operation is automatically continued after the interruption. Display Meaning Blue plug: charging process active or completed. White plug: charging interruption. Running light: animated with active charging operation. End of charging time or set depar‐ ture time. Charging progress bar. Running light: animated with active charging operation. DC charging active on a DC charg‐ ing station. Indicator in blue: charged electrical range. 166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Charging vehicle Mobility White clock: departure time set. If drive readiness is switched off, changes can be made on the Control Display. Departure time can only be changed once. Scheduled de‐ parture times are not adjusted. Settings for cli‐ mate control and charging operation are also applied for scheduled departure times. Blue plug: charging process active or completed. Climate control at departure time White plug: charging interruption. 1. "Settings" Display Meaning Indicator in white: maximum electri‐ cal range. Climate control activated at depar‐ ture time. Range with Range Extender. 2. "Departure time" 3. "Precond. for departure" Setting departure time Level 1 or Level 2 charging: Flashing: ventilation active. Flashing: heating active. Flashing: cooling active. 1. "Settings" 2. "Departure time" 3. "Departure 1:" 4. Set the day of the week if needed. Turn the controller until the desired day of the week is set and press the controller. To select other days of the week, repeat the operation. 5. Set the time. Departure time Turn the controller until the desired time is set and press the controller. The concept Up to three departure times can be set. For optimum range and climate control, the departure time can be set before parking the car. 1. "Settings" With a set departure time, the vehicle is cli‐ mate controlled during the charging process when climate control is set. Climate control output is reduced during the trip. This in‐ creases the range. The following settings are possible at depar‐ ture time: ▷ Climate control at departure time. Activating the departure time 2. "Departure time" Set departure times are displayed. 3. E. g. "Activate depart. time 1" Up to three departure times can be activated. The set departure time will be deactivated, if the departure time was ignored three times in a row. ▷ Planning a one-time departure time. ▷ Planning of up to three regular departure times per day of the week. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 167 Mobility Charging vehicle Climate control General information 4. Connect either a Level 1 or Level 2 charg‐ ing cable to the household socket or the port on the charging station. The following settings for climate control of the vehicle are possible: 5. Attach charging cable corresponding to the charging socket connection. ▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐ ately, refer to page 133. With stationary climate control activated and no charging cable connected, the range is reduced. ▷ Planned climate control at the set depar‐ ture time, refer to page 134. Discharged high-voltage and vehicle battery General information Charging is started. The charging status is not displayed. Do not open vehicle during this time. After several minutes, the vehicle is slightly charged. The onboard electronics are ready again. It is again possible to open the vehicle. The charging status as well as the charging state of the high-voltage battery can be dis‐ played again. Continue charging vehicle until desired range is possible. If the vehicle battery cannot be charged, con‐ tact the service center. In addition to the high-voltage battery, the ve‐ hicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐ quired for operation of the onboard electron‐ ics. If the high-voltage battery and the vehicle bat‐ tery are discharged, it is not possible to oper‐ ate the vehicle. Place vehicle in service To place the vehicle in service, charge as usual. If there is no possibility of charging on site, contact the service center. Charging vehicle with a discharged vehicle battery 1. Unlock the vehicle, if needed, using the integrated key, refer to page 38. 2. Secure the vehicle against rolling. 3. Manually unlock charging port flap if it is locked, refer to page 163. 168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Refueling Mobility Refueling Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. General information In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build up due to gasoline vapors which are dissipated before the tank lid is opened. Overview The button is located on the driver's footwell. Tank venting 1. Switch off drive readiness. 2. Hints Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to page 172, prior to refueling. A sufficient amount of fuel must be added to operate the Range Extender. When the Range Extender is activated, the current charging state is maintained. The vehicle has a greater range. Do not refuel unless the engine is at a standstill and the selector lever is in posi‐ tion P/N Do not refuel unless the engine is at a standstill and the selector lever is in position P/N, other‐ wise the buildup of pressure may cause the fuel nozzle to shut off prematurely.◀ Press button to start the pressure equalization. The status of the tank venting is displayed in the instrument cluster. In rare cases, the tank venting can last several minutes. If the tank venting has been completed, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The tank lid is released for open‐ ing. 3. Open the fuel filler flap. If the fuel filler flap is not opened within 10 minutes after the fuel filler flap was re‐ leased, the fuel filler flap relocks. Press button again. Fuel lid Tank vent Opening The concept Before opening , vent the tank, refer to page 169. The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank. It is designed for special requirements that arise in operation with the Range Ex‐ tender. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 169 Mobility Refueling 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap. Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g. The release is located in the trunk. 1. Open hood, refer to page 183. 2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap. 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise. 3. Open the fuel filler flap. 4. Carefully open the fuel filler flap. Excess pressure can build up in the fuel tank from gasoline vapor. 3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. 5. Fuel the vehicle as usual. This may be diffi‐ cult due to the residue pressure in the tank, caused by frequent stopping of the fuel pump nozzle, e.g. Closing 1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap. Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀ 170 Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Refueling Mobility Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀ Handling fuels Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀ No simultaneous charging and refueling Do not refuel while a charging cable is plugged in, and maintain an adequate safety distance from highly flammable materials. Oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage from burning fuel vapors, e.g., if the charging cable is improperly plug‐ ged in or unplugged.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 171 Mobility Fuel Fuel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Fuel recommendation Note Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case. Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐ age of ethanol Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐ centage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise this could damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀ Recommended fuel grade General fuel quality Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ gine problems, for instance poor engine startup behavior, poor handling and/or poor performance. Switch gas stations or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀ Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ tent. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ out metallic additives. Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, as this can cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other compo‐ nents.◀ BMW recommends AKI 91. Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89. Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ formance.◀ Fuel supply in winter Depending on the region, many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter helps make a cold start easier, e. g. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends filling the tank with the corresponding fuel at the start of winter to ensure the operational re‐ liability of the Range Extender at low tempera‐ tures. Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. 172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Wheels and tires Mobility Wheels and tires Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Tire inflation pressure Safety information Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. The displays of inflation devices may underread by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar. For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Tire inflation pressure specifications ▷ Driving comfort. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 174, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. Checking the tire inflation pressure To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ sure influence the following: ▷ The service life of the tires. ▷ Road safety. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.◀ ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. Tire fill pressures To achieve optimum driving comfort, note the pressure specifications in the Tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 174, and adjust as needed. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐ flation pressure. Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases along with the tire's temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐ fications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 173 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire identification marks Tire size 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's side on the rear door. 18: rim diameter in inches 96: load rating, not for ZR tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Speed letter Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h Tire inflation pressure values T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h i3 V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand 155/70 R 19 84 Q M+S A/S Std 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 0115: tire age 155/70 R 19 84 Q M+S Std Front: 155/70 R 19 84 Q M+S A/S Std Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. 2.3 / 33 - - 2.8 / 41 2.3 / 33 - - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 175/60 R 19 86 Q M+S A/S Std Front: 155/60 R 20 80 Q Std xxx: tire size and tire design Tire age DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the 1st week of 2015. Recommendation Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at least every 6 years. Rear: 175/55 R 20 85 Q Std 174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Wheels and tires Mobility Uniform Tire Quality Grading Temperature Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ quired by law. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear Temperature grade for this tire The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 175 Mobility Wheels and tires Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the rims and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐ ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐ come life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other traffic.◀ Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. Tire damage Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ Changing wheels and tires General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Mounting Hints Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ fects: ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things. 176 Information on mounting tires If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Wheel and tire combination You can ask the service center about the right wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Wheels and tires Approved wheels and tires Mobility Retreaded tires You should only use wheels and tires that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐ facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g., despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to chassis contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.◀ The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot guarantee the operating safety of the vehicle.◀ Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Recommended tire brands Winter tires Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐ vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires. Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Maximum speed for winter tires For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐ age and accidents can occur.◀ Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Your service center will be glad to advise you. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct if needed. Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐ cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles. Storage Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 177 Mobility Wheels and tires Mobility System Sealing container The concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside. The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure. ▷ Sealing container, arrow 1. Hints ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ lity System found on the compressor and sealant container. ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/4 mm or more. Observe use-by date on the sealant container. Compressor ▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable. ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportu‐ nity and have them replaced if needed. Storage The mobility system is located in the storage compartment under the hood. 178 1 On/off reel 2 Holder for bottle 3 Reduce inflation pressure 4 Inflation pressure dial 5 Compressor 6 Connector/cable for socket 7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom of the compressor Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Wheels and tires Filling the tire with sealant Mobility 1. Shake the sealing container. 4. Slide the sealing container upright into the holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ ing that it engages audibly. 2. Take the connection hose completely out of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose. 5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve of the defective wheel. 3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐ tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it engages audibly. 6. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ hicle. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 179 Mobility Wheels and tires 7. With operating readiness or drive readi‐ ness switched on, reel on the compressor. 3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ nection hose in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. 4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ cle. Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐ nutes Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.◀ Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐ nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h. To correct the tire inflation pressure 1. Stop at a suitable location. 2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve stem. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at this point. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not reached: 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel. 3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ tribute the sealant in the tire. 3. Attach the connection hose directly to the compressor. 4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your service center. Stowing the Mobility System 1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐ ant container from the wheel. 2. Remove the connection hose from the sealant container. 180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Wheels and tires 4. Insert the connector into a power socket inside the vehicle. Mobility Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2.5 bar. ▷ Increase pressure: with operating read‐ iness or drive readiness switched on, reel on the compressor. ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ ton on the compressor. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if needed. Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains. Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐ tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐ ble. Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved. Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center. Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: ▷ 155/70 R 19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 181 Mobility Under the hood Under the hood What is important under the hood 1 Washer fluid reservoir 3 Coolant reservoir for climate control 2 With Range Extender: filler flap emergency unlocking 4 Coolant reservoir for drive The occasional use cable compartment in the center is used for storage of the Level 1 charg‐ ing cable and the Level 2 charging cable. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. Moisture can penetrate into the occasional use cable compartment, e.g. in a car wash. If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Fold down wiper arm Hood Hints Working under the hood Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this may result in damage.◀ Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. 182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Under the hood Opening hood Danger of jamming Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Unlocking hood 1. Mobility Press button on the remote con‐ trol or in the driver's footwell, refer to page 44. Opening hood 1. Press the release handle and open the hood. Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed. Closing the hood From approx. 16 in/40 cm height allow to fall and press again to lock the hook completely. Make sure you hear the hood engage. Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ mediately and close it securely.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 183 Mobility Engine oil Engine oil Vehicle features and options 3. Remove the cargo floor panel. This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 4. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove. General information Engine oil consumption depends on the fre‐ quency of Range Extender use. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refuel‐ ing. Checking the oil level Note Check the engine oil level with Range Extender warmed up to operating temperature. 5. After approx. 5, minutes, remove the dip stick and wipe with a lint-free cloth, paper towel or similar. After switching off the Range Extender, wait several minutes before checking the oil level so that the engine oil can collect in the oil pan. Checking 1. Park the vehicle in horizontal position in a safe place. 2. Switch the engine off. 6. Carefully insert the dipstick up to the stop in the measuring tube, and pull it back out. The engine oil level must be between the two marks of the dipstick. 184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Engine oil Mobility Adding or changing engine oil If necessary, have engine oil added or changed by the service center. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 185 Mobility Coolant Coolant Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Hints Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant may cause burns.◀ 1 Coolant reservoir for climate control 2 Coolant reservoir for drive Coolant level Coolant reservoir for climate control Checking 1. Allow the drive to cool down. Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀ 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it. Coolant consists of water and additives. The vehicle's cooling circuits are filled with dif‐ ferent types of coolant. Do not mix the differ‐ ent types of coolant. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about the suitable additives are available from the service center. 3. Check the coolant level. Coolant reservoir The vehicle has two coolant reservoirs that are located under the hood. To ensure the operational reliability of the vehi‐ cle, always check the coolant level of both coolant reservoirs. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tween the minimum and maximum marks in the reservoir. Adding 1. Slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. Open hood, refer to page 183. 186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Coolant Mobility 2. Close cap. 3. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated by the service center as soon as possible. Coolant reservoir for drive Checking 1. Allow the drive to cool down. 2. Check the coolant level. The marks are on the side of the coolant reservoir. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks. Adding 1. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it. 2. Slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 3. Close cap. 4. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated by the service center as soon as possible. Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 187 Mobility Maintenance Maintenance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. BMW maintenance system The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ erational reliability of the vehicle. In some cases scopes and intervals may vary according to the country-specific version. Re‐ placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ rately. Additional information is available from the service center. Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ nizes the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile. Detailed information on service requirements, refer to page 83, can be displayed on the Con‐ trol Display. Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ mote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently. Storage periods Note Maintenance and repairs Have maintenance and repair work per‐ formed only by a service center or a workshop that works according to BMW specifications with appropriately trained personnel. Other‐ wise, there is the risk of fatal injury from elec‐ trocution due to the high-voltage system's high voltage.◀ 188 Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if needed, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Maintenance Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els for additional information on service re‐ quirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ nance. Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Note Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work‐ shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.◀ Mobility Position Located on the driver's side is an OBD socket for reading the vehicle data. On vehicles with Range Extender, additional components are checked that are critical for its emissions mix. Emissions Applies to vehicles with Range Extender. ▷ The warning lamp lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 189 Mobility Replacing components Replacing components Vehicle features and options 4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side. This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Wiper blade replacement Hints 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place. 6. Fold down the wipers. Rear: replacing the wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades 1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper blade, arrow. Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.◀ Front: Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to page 74, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up the wipers. 2. Attach a new wiper blade. It must engage audibly. 3. Fold down the wipers. Lamp and bulb replacement Hints 3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐ sition. Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ tion to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to 190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Replacing components the service center if you are unfamiliar those or if they have not been described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center. Danger of burns Mobility If the headlights do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this. Headlight setting Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is a danger of getting burned.◀ Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system, you should always reel off the lights affected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐ lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐ ice after a replacement. Front lights, bulb replacement At a glance Halogen headlights Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀ Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. 1 Parking lights / daytime running lights 2 Low beams Halogen headlights with LED lighting elements Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀ Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ light glass does not need to be changed. 1 Parking lights / daytime running lights 2 Low beams Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 191 Mobility Replacing components Low beams Follow general instructions, refer to page 190. 55-watt bulb, H7. 1. Fold up cover in front of the headlights. 6. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed in reverse order of removal. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place. 7. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages. LED headlights Hints With LED headlamps, all front lights and park‐ ing lights/daytime running lights are designed with LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove. 3. Pull off the connector. At a glance 1 Parking lights / daytime running lights 2 Low beams Parking lights/daytime running lights Parking lights/daytime running lights are de‐ signed with LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. 4. Press bulb holder slightly inward, loosen it to the right from the anchor and fold it down. Turn signal and high beams Follow general instructions, refer to page 190. 5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐ move. 192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Replacing components Access Mobility High beams 55-watt bulb, H11. 1. Turn the right bulb holder counterclock‐ wise and remove. In the wheel house, turn the cover counter‐ clockwise and remove it. Turn signal 24-watt bulb, PSY24W. 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 1. Turn the left bulb holder counterclockwise and remove. 3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 4. Attach the cover to the wheel house. Turn signal in exterior mirror Follow general instructions, refer to page 190. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Tail lights, bulb replacement 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 190. 3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. The tail lights in the tailgate feature LED tech‐ nology. 4. Attach the cover to the wheel house. The lights in the bumper include the function of the rear fog lamp and the reverse gear lights. In addition, the lights in the bumper assume the function of the tail lights if the tailgate is opened. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 193 Mobility Replacing components Changing wheels Hints Which is why no spare tire is available. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center. Jacking points for the vehicle jack After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by the service center to ensure that all comfort features are fully available and that any Check Control mes‐ sages of these comfort features are no longer displayed. Charge vehicle battery Do not use any charging devices Do not charge the vehicle battery with an external charging device; otherwise, there is a risk of property damage, e. g., to the vehicle's electronics.◀ Charging a discharged battery, refer to page 168. Power failure The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated at the positions shown. After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐ tings updated, e. g.: ▷ Time: update. Vehicle battery ▷ Date: update. The vehicle battery has 12 volts. The battery supplies the onboard electronics with energy. ▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize the system, refer to page 52. Information about the high-voltage system, re‐ fer to page 160. Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy‐ cling center. Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery. Further information about the battery can be obtained from your service center. Fuses Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ ble.◀ 194 Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. Hints Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Replacing components Mobility could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ Replacing fuse The fuses are located in the passenger foot‐ well under the dashboard. 1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1. 2. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2. Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet. 3. Replace the fuse in question. 4. The installation is done in reverse order from the removal. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 195 Mobility Breakdown assistance Breakdown assistance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Hints Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ able conditions.◀ Overview Hazard warning flashers SOS button in the roofliner Requirements ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. The button is located in the center console. ▷ The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ The Assist system is functional. Intelligent Emergency Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. The concept 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green. In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ quest can be made through this system. ▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency Request was initiated. General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency. Initiating an Emergency Request If a cancel prompt appears on the display, the Emergency Request can be aborted. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been established. 196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Breakdown assistance When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum‐ stances. For this, data are transmitted to the BMW Response Center which serve to deter‐ mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g. the current position of the vehicle, if it can be established. ▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW Response Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard at the BMW Response Center. Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button. Warning triangle Mobility First aid kit Note Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly. Storage The first aid kit is located at the rear of the trunk. Jump-starting Not jumping or directly charging the ve‐ hicle battery Do not jump or directly charge the vehicle bat‐ tery using conventional jump starting; other‐ wise, because of the high voltage of the drive system, there is a danger of fatal injury from electrocution.◀ If the high-voltage battery and the vehicle bat‐ tery are discharged, it is not possible to oper‐ ate the vehicle. In this case, do not give a jump start, but instead charge the battery as usual using the charging cable, refer to page 168. Towing Note Tow-starting and towing The warning triangle is located on the inside of the tailgate. For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ To remove, loosen the bracket. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 197 Mobility Breakdown assistance Transporting your vehicle 3. Engage selector lever position N. Note If there are electrical malfunctions, it may hap‐ pen that you can't change the selector lever position. Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown. Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ cur.◀ Tow truck Towing other vehicles Hints Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ sponse.◀ Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.◀ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ pending on local regulations. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform. Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ dow. Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐ sitioning the vehicle. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Pushing vehicle ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners. To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger area, push it for a short distance at a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h. The vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever position N. In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐ ceed as follows: 1. Switch on drive readiness, refer to page 64. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset. Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. 2. Depress brake pedal. 198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Breakdown assistance Tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ ried in the vehicle. The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. The tow fitting is located in the storage com‐ partment under the hood. Mobility there is the risk of fatal injury from electrocu‐ tion due to the system's high voltage.◀ Esliding fluids Do not touch any fluids esliding from the high-voltage battery, or the skin can sustain chemical burns.◀ Tow fitting, information on use General information ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. If you are involved in an accident with your ve‐ hicle, compliance with the following additional safety precautions is required with regard to the high-voltage system: ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. ▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for positioning the vehicle. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. ▷ Secure the crash site. ▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage system. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.◀ ▷ Engage selector lever position P, set the parking brake and reel off operating and drive readiness. Screw thread for tow fitting ▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting. ▷ Do not inhale any gases esliding from the high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a safe distance from the vehicle. Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out. What to do after an accident Hints After an accident After an accident, do not touch any highvoltage components such as orange colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in contact with exposed high-voltage cables. Otherwise, Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 199 Mobility Care Care Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with high-pressure washers When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors and camera lenses on the outside of the vehicle for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀ Have the charging port cleaned by trained personnel If the charging port is dirty, have the car cleaned only by appropriately trained person‐ nel. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury from high voltage.◀ Car washes General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ age the vehicle. Hints Closing the charging port flap Close the charging port flap while wash‐ ing the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.◀ Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/60 ℃. If the vehicle has a glass sunroof and charging port flap, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is maintained. Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or prelimi‐ nary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. 200 Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.◀ Automatic car washes Hints Do not use high pressure washing sys‐ tems With washing systems operating at high pres‐ sures and nozzle positions close to the win‐ dows, drops of water can penetrate.◀ ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms. ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. ▷ Unscrew the rod antenna. ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 73, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ vation. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Care tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 50. Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.◀ Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps: 1. Drive into the car wash. 2. Engage selector lever position N. 3. Remove foot from brake pedal. 4. Press the Start/Stop button. In this way, operating readiness remains switched on, and a Check-Control mes‐ sage is displayed. To activate drive readiness: 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ ping on the brake turns operating readiness off. Selector lever position Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally: ▷ With operating readiness turned off. ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. Headlights ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleansers. ▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper. Mobility After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. Completely remove all residues on the win‐ dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using care and cleaning products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved. Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.◀ Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ quency and extent of your car care to these influences. Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ tered or discolored. Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 201 Mobility Care Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ ularly when they have been exposed to road salt. Rubber components Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or noises. Suitable care products are available from the service center. Fine wood parts Upholstery material care Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth. Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously. Damage from Velcro® fasteners Plastic components These include: ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. ▷ Roofliner. ▷ Lamp lenses. ▷ Instrument cluster cover. Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ ▷ Matt black spray-coated components. Caring for special components Dampen cloth lightly with water. ▷ Carbon parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Do not soak the roofliner. Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ turer's instructions. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk. 202 ▷ Painted parts in the interior. No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.◀ Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Care Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.◀ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry. Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ rior for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only. Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent. Displays/monitors Cleaning displays and screens Mobility Keeping out moisture Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit; otherwise, electrical components can be damaged.◀ Avoid pressure Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀ Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. Long idle times and long-term vehicle storage Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for ex‐ tended periods with a low charging state Before storing the vehicle for an extended pe‐ riod, check the battery charge indicator to en‐ sure that the high-voltage battery is fully charged. For longer idle times, park the vehicle with a charging plug plugged into a suitable power source. Regularly check charging state. Otherwise, the high-voltage battery can be damaged when there is excessive discharge.◀ For idle phases that last several weeks, park the vehicle with a fully charged battery if possi‐ ble. Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if the electric range is less than 6 mls, approx. 10 km. With storage times of up to three months, if possible plug the vehicle into a suitable power source or park it in a nearly fully charged state. Note The service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months. Do not use any chemical or household cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐ fected.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Reference This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Reference Technical data Technical data Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Note The technical data and specifications in this Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed values can be found in the approval documents, on informa‐ tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained from the service center. The information in the vehicle documents al‐ ways has priority. Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method. roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ment, tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna, BMW i3 Width with mirrors inches/mm 80.3/2,039 Width without mirrors inches/mm 69.9/1,775 Height inches/mm 62.1/1,578 Length inches/mm 157.8/4,008 Wheelbase inches/mm 101.2/2,570 Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 32.4/9.86 206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Technical data Reference Weights BMW i3 without Range Extender Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,615/1,640 Load lbs/kg 715/324 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,720/780 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,005/909 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.1–36.9/260–1,100 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,815/1,730 Load lbs/kg 650/295 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,785/810 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,205/1,000 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.1–36.9/260–1,100 BMW i3 with Range Extender Capacities Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters Notes 1.9/7 With optional Range Ex‐ tender Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 207 Reference Appendix Appendix Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐ hicle are listed here. Correction to the Owner's Manual This corresponds to pressing the re‐ mote control button. Hood Opening from the outside The hood cannot be opened from the outside. Opposite to the description in this Owner's Manual, the following changes were imple‐ mented after the editorial deadline: Unlocking hood Remote control The hood cannot be unlocked using the re‐ mote control. Press the button in the driver's floor area to unlock the button. Adjusting Unlocking The settings for hood and tailgate are not available. 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Unlock the tailgate 4 Panic mode Tailgate Unlock the tailgate Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second to unlock the tail‐ gate. Depending on the settings, the doors are un‐ locked as well. Unlocking the tailgate separately in the case of Comfort Access Press button on tailgate's exterior. 208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Appendix Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Reference 209 Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ tem 107 ACC, Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go 110 Accelerator pedal posi‐ tions 68 Accessories and parts 7 AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging cable 162 Activated-charcoal filter 133 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, ACC 110 Adjustments, seats/head re‐ straints 53 Adjustments, steering wheel 59 Advance climate control, refer to Stationary climate con‐ trol 133 After washing vehicle 201 Airbags 93 Airbags, indicator/warning light 94 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ culated-air mode 129, 132 Air conditioner 128 Air, dehumidifying, refer to Cooling function 129, 131 Air distribution, manual 129, 131 Air flow, air conditioner 130 Air flow, automatic climate control 133 Air pressure, tires 173 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ tion 133 Alarm system 49 Alarm, unintentional 50 210 All around the center con‐ sole 16 All around the roofliner 17 All around the steering wheel 14 All-season tires, refer to Win‐ ter tires 177 Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 136 Ambient light 92 Antifreeze, washer fluid 74 Antilock Brake System, ABS 107 Anti-slip control, refer to DSC 107 Approved axle load 207 Ash tray 139 Assistance when driving off 109 Assist system, refer to Intelli‐ gent Safety 100 AUTO intensity 132 Automatic car wash 200 Automatic climate con‐ trol 130 Automatic cornering adjust‐ ment 57 Automatic Cruise Control with Stop & Go 110 Automatic Curb Monitor 57 Automatic deactivation, frontseat passenger airbags 95 Automatic deactivation of the high-voltage system 34 Automatic headlight con‐ trol 91 Automatic locking 48 Automatic recirculated-air control 132 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ mate control 131 AUTO program, intensity 132 Average fuel consumption 87 Average speed 87 Axle loads, weights 207 B Backup charging 168 Band-aids, refer to First aid kit 197 Bar for tow-starting/ towing 198 Battery, 12 volt 194 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 194 Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 39 Battery state indicator 77 Battery, vehicle 194 Being pulled, referred to Tow‐ ing 197 Belts, safety belts 55 BMW Assist 6 BMW eDRIVE 31 BMW Homepage 6 BMW i Driver’s Guide App 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys‐ tem 188 Body work, see Working on the vehicle 34 Brake assistant 107 Brake discs, break-in 148 Brake pads, break-in 148 Braking, hints 150 Breakdown assistance 196 Break-in 148 Brightness of Control Dis‐ play 89 Bulb replacement 190 Bulb replacement, front 191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Bulb replacement, tail lights 193 Bulbs and lamps 190 Button, RES 113 Button, Start/Stop 64 Bypassing, refer to Jumpstarting 197 C California Proposition 65 Warning 8 Camera-based Cruise Con‐ trol 110 Camera lenses, care 203 Camera, rearview cam‐ era 121 Car battery 194 Car care products 201 Care, displays 203 Care, vehicle 201 Cargo 152 Cargo area 141 Cargo area, enlarging 141 Cargo area, storage compart‐ ments 145 Cargo cover 141 Cargo, securing 153 Cargo straps, securing cargo 153 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ trol 38 Carpet, care 203 Car wash 200 Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 149 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ ice 188 Center armrest 143 Center console 16 Central locking system 44 Central screen, refer to Con‐ trol Display 18 Changes, technical, refer to Safety 7 Changing wheels 194 Changing wheels/tires 176 Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 160 Charging, refer to Charging vehicle 160 Charging, refer to Vehicle charging 160 Charging screen 76 Charging state indicator, high-voltage battery 77 Charging status, see display of the charging status 164 Charging vehicle 160 Charging vehicle, refer to Ve‐ hicle charging 160 Chassis number, see vehicle identification number 10 Check Control 78 Check engine oil 184 Check oil level 184 Children, seating position 60 Children, transporting safely 60 Child restraint fixing sys‐ tem 60 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 61 Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 60 Child seat, mounting 60 Child seats 60 Chrome parts, care 202 Cigarette lighter 139 Cleaning displays 203 Climate control 128, 130 Clock 83 Closing/opening via door lock 43 Closing/opening with remote control 41 Clothes hooks 145 Coasting 69 Combination reel, refer to Turn signals 71 Combination switch, refer to Wiper system 72 Reference Comfort Access 46 COMFORT program, Dy‐ namic Driving Control 108 Compartments in the doors 145 Compass 137 Compressor 178 Computer, refer to On-board computer 86 Condensation on win‐ dows 129, 132 Condensation under the vehi‐ cle 151 Condition Based Service CBS 188 Confirmation signal 48 ConnectedDrive 6 ConnectedDrive Services 6 Connecting electrical devi‐ ces 139 Contact with water, high-volt‐ age system 34 Control Display 18 Control Display, settings 88 Controller 18 Control systems, driving sta‐ bility 107 Convenient opening with the remote control 41 Coolant 186 Coolant temperature 82 Cooling function 129, 131 Cooling, maximum 132 Cooling system 186 Corrosion on brake discs 151 Cosmetic mirror 139 Courtesy lamps during un‐ locking 41 Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ cle locked 42 Cruise control 116 Cruise control, active with Stop & Go 110 Cruise control, refer to Cam‐ era-based Cruise Con‐ trol 110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 211 Reference Everything from A to Z Cruising range 83 Current fuel consumption 87 D Damage, tires 176 Data, technical 206 Daytime running lights 91 Defrosting, refer to Windows, defrosting 129, 132 Dehumidifying, air 129, 131 Deleting personal data 24 Deletion of personal data 24 Departure times, stationary climate control 134 Digital clock 83 Digital compass 137 Dimensions 206 Dimmable exterior mirrors 58 Dimmable interior rearview mirror 58 Direction indicator, refer to Turn signals 71 Display for performance and energy recovery 77 Display lighting, refer to In‐ strument lighting 91 Displays 75 Displays, cleaning 203 Displays, eDRIVE system 76 Displays, high-voltage sys‐ tem 76 Disposal, coolant 187 Disposal, vehicle battery 194 Distance control, refer to PDC 118 Divided screen view, split screen 23 Door lock 43 Door lock, refer to Remote control 38 Drive display 77 Drive-off assistant 109 Drive-off assistant, refer to DSC 107 Drive readiness in detail 65 212 Drive readiness, switching off 67 Drive readiness, switching on 65 Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 108 Driving in detail 68 Driving instructions, breakin 148 Driving instructions, eDRIVE drive system 148 Driving mode 108 Driving notes, general 149 Driving, refer to drive readi‐ ness in detail 65 Driving stability control sys‐ tems 107 Driving, Start/Stop button 64 Driving style analysis 157 Driving tips 149 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 107 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol 108 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 107 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 108 E ECO PRO 155 ECO PRO+ 155 ECO PRO display 155 ECO PRO driving mode 155 ECO PRO driving style analy‐ sis 157 ECO PRO mode 155 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ struction 156 eDRIVE drive system, driving instructions 148 eDRIVE, electric driving, see BMW eDRIVE 32 eDrive system, at a glance 31 eDRIVE system, displays 76 EfficientDynamics 157 Electric driving 68 Electric driving, see BMW eDRIVE 32 Electric range 83 Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to DSC 107 Emergency charging, refer to Backup charging 168 Emergency detection, remote control 39 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 170 Emergency Request 196 Emergency start function, en‐ gine start 39 Emergency unlocking, trans‐ mission lock 67 Energy Control 87 Energy recovery, display‐ ing 77 Energy recovery, driving sta‐ bility control systems 107 Engine coolant 186 Engine oil 184 Engine oil, adding 185 Engine start during malfunc‐ tion 39 Engine start, jump-start‐ ing 197 Entering a car wash 200 Equipment, interior 135 Error displays, see Check Control 78 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram, refer to DSC 107 Exchanging wheels/tires 176 Exhaust system 149 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 58 Exterior mirrors 57 External start 197 External temperature dis‐ play 82 External temperature warn‐ ing 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Eyes for securing cargo 153 F Failure message, see Check Control 78 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ tional alarm 50 Fan, refer to Air flow 130, 133 Fine wood, care 202 First aid kit 197 Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ ting 199 Flat tire, changing wheels 194 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 99 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 96 Flat tire, warning lamp 97, 99 Flooding 150 Floor carpet, care 203 Floor mats, care 203 Folding back rear seat back‐ rests 141 Fold-out position, wiper 74 Foot brake 150 Front airbags 93 Front armrest 143 Front beverage holder, front cup holder 144 Front bottle holder, refer to Front cup holder 144 Front can holder, refer to Front cup holder 144 Front cup holder 144 Front-end collision warning with City Braking func‐ tion 101 Front holder for bever‐ ages 144 Front lights 191 front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 95 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator lamp 95 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 99 Fuel 172 Fuel consumption, current 87 Fuel consumption, refer to Average fuel consump‐ tion 87 Fuel filler flap 169 Fuel gauge, Range Ex‐ tender 82 Fuel lid 169 Fuel quality 172 Fuel recommendation 172 Fuel, tank capacity 207 Fuse 194 G Garage door opener, refer to Universal Integrated Remote Control 135 Gasoline 172 General driving notes 149 Glare shield 139 Glass sunroof, powered 51 Glove compartment 143 GPS location, vehicle posi‐ tion 89 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ proved 207 H Halogen headlights, bulb re‐ placement 0 Handbrake, refer to parking brake 70 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ nating code 136 Hazard warning flashers 196 Head airbags 93 Headlight control, auto‐ matic 91 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ ture 90 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ ture, remote control 48 Reference Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ ture via remote control 42 Headlight flasher 72 Headlight glass 191 Headlights 191 Headlights, care 201 Head restraints 53 Head restraints, front 56 Head restraints, rear 56 Heavy cargo, stowing 153 Height, vehicle 206 High beams 72 High beams, bulb replace‐ ment 192 High-voltage battery, charg‐ ing state indicator 77 High-voltage battery, dis‐ charge 149 High-voltage battery, heated 69 High-voltage battery, heavily discharged 69 High-voltage system, auto‐ matic deactivation 34 High-voltage system, contact with water 34 High-voltage system, dis‐ plays 76 High-voltage system, safety 34 Hills 150 Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 109 Hints 6 Hold function 71 Homepage 6 Hood 44 Hood via remote control 42 Horn 14 Hot exhaust system 149 Hydroplaning 150 I Ice warning, see External temperature warning 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 213 Reference Everything from A to Z Icy roads, see External tem‐ perature warning 82 Identification marks, tires 174 Identification number, see ve‐ hicle identification num‐ ber 10 iDrive 18 Ignition key, refer to Remote control 38 Illuminant replacement 190 Important under the hood 182 Increase range 154 Increase range with Range Extender 69 Indication of a flat tire 97, 99 Indicator and alarm lamps, see Check Control 78 Indicator lamp, see Check Control 78 Individual air distribu‐ tion 129, 131 Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 39 Inflation pressure, tires 173 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 99 Info display, refer to OnBoard computer 86 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 97 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 99 Instrument cluster 75 Instrument lighting 91 Integrated key 38 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 29 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest 196 Intelligent Safety 100 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ gram 132 Interior equipment 135 Interior lights 91 214 Interior lights during unlock‐ ing 41 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 42 Interior motion sensor 50 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ matic dimming feature 58 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ pass 137 Interior rearview mirror, man‐ ually dimmable 58 Internet page 6 Interval display, service re‐ quirements 83 Interval mode 73 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 194 Jump-starting 197 Jump starting, refer to Backup charging 168 K Key/remote control 38 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Access 46 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ sonal Profile 39 Knee airbag 94 L Lamp replacement, front 191 Lamp replacement, see Bulb replacement 190 Language on Control Dis‐ play 88 Lashing eyes, securing cargo 153 LATCH child restraint sys‐ tem 61 Leather, care 201 LED headlights, bulb replace‐ ment 192 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ odes 191 Length, vehicle 206 Letters and numbers, enter‐ ing 24 Level 1 Charging 165 Level 1 charging cable 162 Level 2 Charging 166 Level 2 charging cable 162 Light alloy wheels, care 202 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 191 Lighter 139 Lighting 90 Lights 90 Light switch 90 Load 153 Loading 152 Lock, door 43 Locking/unlocking via door lock 43 Locking/unlocking with re‐ mote control 41 Locking, automatic 48 Locking, settings 48 Locking via tailgate 46 Longer idle phases 203 Long idle times and long-term vehicle storage 203 Long-term vehicle stor‐ age 203 Low beams 90 M Maintaining charging state, refer to Range Extender 69 Maintenance 188 Maintenance require‐ ments 188 Maintenance, service require‐ ments 83 Maintenance system, BMW 188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Make-up mirror 139 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 78 Manual air distribu‐ tion 129, 131 Manual air flow 130, 133 Manual operation, door lock 43 Manual operation, exterior mirrors 57 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 170 Manual operation, Park Dis‐ tance Control PDC 119 Manual operation, rearview camera 121 Marking on approved tires 177 Master key, refer to Remote control 38 Maximum cooling 132 Maximum speed, display 84 Maximum speed, winter tires 177 Measure, units of 89 Medical kit 197 Menu, EfficientDynamics 157 Menu in instrument clus‐ ter 85 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ ing concept 19 Messages, see Check Con‐ trol 78 Microfilter 130, 133 Minimum tread, tires 176 Mirrors 57 Mobile communication devi‐ ces in the vehicle 150 Mobility System 178 Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 7 Moisture in headlight 191 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ play 18 Mounting of child restraint systems 60 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 14 Multimedia 6 N Navigation 6 Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 56 Neck restraints, rear, refer to Head restraints 56 Neutral cleaner, see wheel cleaner 202 New wheels and tires 176 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ towing 198 O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 189 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ agnosis 189 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 122 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐ ommended fuel grade 172 Odometer 82 Office 6 Oil 184 Oil, adding 185 Oil change interval, service requirements 83 Old batteries, disposal 194 On-board computer 86 Onboard monitor, refer to Control Display 18 Opening/closing via door lock 43 Opening and closing 38 Opening and closing, without remote control 43 Opening and closing, with re‐ mote control 41 Operating concept, iDrive 18 Reference Optional equipment, standard equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Auto‐ matic recirculated-air con‐ trol 132 Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 82 P Paint, vehicle 201 Parallel parking assistant 123 Park Distance Control PDC 118 Parked car ventilation, refer to Stationary climate con‐ trol 133 Parked vehicle, condensa‐ tion 151 Parking aid, refer to PDC 118 Parking assistant 123 Parking brake 70 Parking lights 90 Parts and accessories 7 Passenger side mirror, tilting downward 57 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ era 122 PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol 118 Pedestrian warning with city braking function 104 Performance display 77 Personal Profile 39 Personal Profile, exporting profiles 40 Pinch protection system, glass sunroof 52 Pinch protection system, win‐ dows 51 Plastic, care 202 Power failure 194 Power sunroof, glass 51 Power windows 50 Pressure, tire air pres‐ sure 173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 215 Reference Everything from A to Z Pressure warning FTM, tires 99 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ file 39 Programmable memory but‐ tons, iDrive 23 Protective function, glass sunroof 52 Protective function, win‐ dows 51 Pulling, refer to Towing 197 Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 18 Q Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging cable 162 Quick charging, see Level 2 Charging 166 R Radiator fluid 186 Radio 6 Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 38 Rain sensor 73 Range Extender, fuel gauge 82 Range Extender, increasing range 69 Range Extender, mainte‐ nance run 69 Rear beverage holder, rear cup holder 145 Rear bottle holder, refer to Rear cup holder 145 Rear can holder, refer to Rear Cup holder 145 Rear cup holder 145 Rear holder for bever‐ ages 145 Rearview camera 121 Rearview mirror 57 216 Rear window de‐ froster 129, 132 Recirculated-air filter 133 Recirculated-air mode 129, 132 Recommended fuel grade 172 Recommended tire brands 177 Refueling 169 Remaining range 83 Remote control/key 38 Remote control, malfunc‐ tion 43 Remote control, univer‐ sal 135 Replacement fuse 194 Replacing wheels/tires 176 Reporting safety defects 10 RES button 113 RES button, see Camerabased cruise control, ACC 110 RES button, see Cruise con‐ trol 116 Reserve warning, refer to Range 83 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 97 Retaining straps, securing cargo 153 Retreaded tires 177 Roadside parking lights 91 RON recommended fuel grade 172 Roofliner 17 Rope for tow-starting/ towing 198 Rubber components, care 202 S Safe braking 150 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ er's seat and front passen‐ ger seat 55 Safety belts 55 Safety belts, care 202 Safety of the high-voltage system 34 Safety systems, airbags 93 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ play 18 Screw thread, see screw thread for tow fitting, screw thread for tow fitting 199 Sealant 178 Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 55 Seat heating, front 54 Seating position for chil‐ dren 60 Seats 53 Secondary lights, rear 193 Selection list in instrument cluster 85 Sensors, care 203 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements, Condi‐ tion Based Service CBS 188 Service requirements, dis‐ play 83 Services, ConnectedDrive 6 SET button, see Camerabased cruise control, ACC 110 SET button, see Cruise con‐ trol 116 Settings, locking/unlock‐ ing 48 Settings, mirrors 57 Settings on Control Dis‐ play 88 Side airbags 93 Signaling, horn 14 Signals when unlocking 48 Sitting safely 53 Size 206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Slide/tilt glass roof 51 Smallest turning radius 206 Snow chains 181 Socket 139 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ nostics 189 SOS button 196 Spare fuse 194 Speed, average 87 Speed limit detection, onboard computer 87 Speed limiter, display 84 Speed Limit Information 84 Speed warning 87 Split screen 23 Stability control systems 107 Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charging cable 162 Standard charging, see Level 1 Charging 165 Standing air conditioning, re‐ mote control 48 Start/Stop button 64 Start function during malfunc‐ tion 39 Stationary climate con‐ trol 133 Status control display, tires 97 Status information, iDrive 22 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Steering wheel, adjusting 59 Storage compartments 143 Storage compartments, loca‐ tions 143 Storage, tires 177 Storing the vehicle 203 Summer tires, tread 175 Sun visor 139 Supplementary text mes‐ sage 81 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ ing 108 Switching on, drive readi‐ ness 65 Switch off, drive readiness 67 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 22 T Tailgate closing 46 Tailgate opening 45 Tailgate via remote con‐ trol 42 Tail lights, bulb replace‐ ment 193 Tank unlocking, refer to Tank vent 169 Tank vent 169 Technical changes, refer to Safety 7 Technical data 206 Telephone 6 Temperature, air condi‐ tioner 129 Temperature, automatic cli‐ mate control 131 Temperature display for ex‐ ternal temperature 82 Text message, supplemen‐ tary 81 Theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 49 Tilt alarm sensor 49 Tire damage 176 Tire identification marks 174 Tire inflation pressure 173 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ tor, refer to FTM 99 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 96 Tires, changing 176 Tire sealant 178 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 173 Tire tread 175 Tone 6 Total vehicle weight 207 Touchpad 21 Tow fitting 199 Reference Towing 197 Tow lug, see Tow fitting 199 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor 96 Traction control 108 TRACTION, driving dynam‐ ics 108 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 67 Transporting children safely 60 Tread, tires 175 Trip computer 87 Triple turn signal activa‐ tion 71 Trip odometer 82 Turning circle lines, rearview camera 122 Turning radius 206 Turn signal, bulb replace‐ ment 192 Turn signals, operation 71 U Unintentional alarm 50 Units of measure 89 Universal remote control 135 Unlocking/locking via door lock 43 Unlocking/locking with re‐ mote control 41 Unlocking, settings 48 Updates made after the edito‐ rial deadline 7 Upholstery care 202 USB interface 140 V Vanity mirror 139 Vehicle battery 194 Vehicle battery, replac‐ ing 194 Vehicle, break-in 148 Vehicle care 201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 217 Reference Everything from A to Z Vehicle features and op‐ tions 6 Vehicle identification num‐ ber 10 Vehicle jack 194 Vehicle paint 201 Vehicle position, GPS loca‐ tion 89 Vehicle wash 200 Ventilation 133 Venting, refer to Stationary climate control 133 VIN, see vehicle identification number 10 Voice activation system 26 W Warning and indicator lamps, see Check Control 78 Warning displays, see Check Control 78 Warning messages, see Check Control 78 Warning triangle 197 Warranty 7 Washer fluid 74 Washer nozzles, wind‐ shield 73 Washer system 72 Washing, vehicle 200 Water, high-voltage sys‐ tem 34 Water on roads 150 Weights 207 Welcome lamps during un‐ locking 41 Welcome lights 90 What to do after an acci‐ dent 199 Wheelbase, vehicle 206 Wheel cleaner 202 Wheels, changing 176 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 173 218 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 99 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 96 Width, vehicle 206 Window defroster, rear 129, 132 Windows, powered 50 Windshield washer fluid 74 Windshield washer noz‐ zles 73 Windshield washer sys‐ tem 72 Windshield wiper 72 Winter storage, care 203 Winter tires, suitable tires 177 Winter tires, tread 175 Wiper 72 Wiper blades, replacing 190 Wiper fluid 74 Wiper, fold-out position 74 Wiper system 72 Wood, care 202 Word match concept, naviga‐ tion 25 Working on the body, see Working on the vehicle 34 Working on the high-voltage system, see Working on the vehicle 34 Working under the hood 182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15 01 40 2 960 865 ue *BL296086500O* Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 865 - II/15